Home
        Apple 12/600PS Printer User Manual
         Contents
1.                                              10                                                                Replacing the Fuser    315    11 Replace the connector cover     AN    SL ae                                                 12                                                 316 l Appendix F    Replacing the air and ozone filters    1 Remove the cover           WWM   WWWWN   b  e   e  e  e  e  e  e    oO                                2 Unlock and remove the used air filter        To unlock it  slide the air filter in the Then lift it off the cover   direction of the arrow     Replacing the Fuser   317    318    Appendix F    4    Insert the new air filter and lock it in place        Align the slots with the tabs  then slide  the new filter in the direction of the  arrow to lock it in place     Grasp the tab on the used ozone filter and remove the filter from its slot                             5 Place a new ozone filter in the slot      i                            6 Replace the cover over both filters           MAWN  AVAL  eo  e  e  e  e  e  e  e  e    i                                    Replacing the Fuser    319    Replacing the separation discharger unit  1 Open the printer   s door     2 Open the top cover                                            3 Remove the used separation discharge unit                                      fat                         IMPORTANT Avoid getting loose toner on the density sensor window     320    Appendix F    5 Insert the 
2.                         To load paper  see    Loading the Optional  250 Sheet Universal Cassette    in Chapter 9     You ve now completed installing the 250 sheet universal cassette  For  information about printing options  see Chapter 6 if you are using a  Macintosh computer or Chapter 7 if you are using an IBM PC or compatible  computer     136   Chapter 5    Adding hard disks    You can install an internal hard disk and attach up to six external SCSI 40  MB  or larger  hard disks to the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  The hard disk  provides space for font storage     When you connect one or more hard disks to your printer to store fonts   documents will print faster because your computer will rarely need to  download a font to the printer  You ll also improve network performance  because less information is transferred over network cables     When you do download a font  you can choose to download it either to a hard  disk or to the printer   s RAM  Downloading it to a disk stores it there  permanently  or until you remove it   If you have a Macintosh  you can  initialize the disks and download fonts to them by using the Apple Printer  Utility program  see    Sending Fonts to the Printer    in Chapter 2   If you have  an IBM PC or compatible computer  you can initialize the disks and  download fonts to them by using the Font Downloader in the Printer Setup  dialog box  see    Downloading Fonts    in Chapter 7      Connecting a previously used hard disk    The Color LaserWrit
3.      A                G g  o VT het IR   i    7  gt   JJ  VA    Reattach the fuser door strap     17                      Appendix F    18  19    20    Close the fuser access door and the paper pickup access door   Replace the fuser oil bottle     Close the cover                                     Sg    TE    v  ai v  Ni    7         x  e                Ae  ee        ely             Close the printer   s door     Replacing the transfer drum cleaning unit    1  2    If necessary  close the multipurpose tray     Open the door to the paper pickup area                                               Replacing the Fuser   311    3  Pullthe paper pickup unit out                                                     4                                                 312   Appendix F    5 Unplug the cable connector                                                                 6               TPT I ee teee eee  eoooe  ee N    Ja pN  Da     a                                                                      Replacing the Fuser    313    7 Slide the unit to the left  then pull it out of the printer                                      My i L        _  Ne Se N  ANEN  iP aR      A See l  ana a     Nl                                  TAN       N             8 insert the new cleaning unit                                                       _ oe  TD  AS a    ATL N           LA                   314 Appendix F    9 Lower the lever to a vertical position and snap it into place              
4.      Installing RAM    The printer   s controller board has two slots  marked J10 and J11  for installing  additional memory  RAM is provided on SIMMs  Single Inline Memory  Modules  that you insert into the slots     Your printer comes with 8 MB of RAM soldered on the main board and 4  MB inserted into slot J10     You must have at least 12 MB of RAM in the printer  and you can increase  the total to as much as 40 MB  For example  to increase the memory size  to 16 MB  install a single 4 MB SIMM in slot J11  To increase the memory  size to 24 or 40 MB  install one or two 16 MB SIMMs in slots J10 and J11   16  8   24  16  16  8   40      Installing Options    145    146    Chapter 5    The table below lists RAM configurations you can use  Remember  the total  amount of memory  shown in the first column  includes the 8 MB of RAM  soldered on the controller board     Amount of memory Slot J10 Slot J11   megabytes    12 MB  standard  0 MB 4 MB  13 MB 4 MB 1 MB  16 MB 4 MB 4 MB  24 MB 16 MB 0 MB  25 MB 16 MB 1 MB  28 MB 4 MB 16 MB  40 MB 16 MB 16 MB    IMPORTANT The printer requires 12 MB RAM and wont work with less     A total of 16 MB of RAM gives you improved print quality in legal sized  documents     WARNING Make sure the printer is turned off and plugged in  for  grounding      If necessary  turn the printer so that the rear  opposite the side with the Apple logo and  printer   s name  is accessible     Get help moving the printer  It takes at least two people to move it sa
5.      When you print a bitmapped font  it prints at a resolution of 72 dpi  Because  most modern printers can print at resolutions far better than this  your  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS prints at 600 dpi   printed bitmapped fonts  almost always have jagged edges or stairstep sides     Fortunately  the Macintosh can use bitmapped fonts in combination with  other font formats  reserving bitmaps for the screen and other kinds of fonts  for the printer     PostScript fonts    PostScript is a page description language that defines the characters  symbols   and images that appear on each page of a document  A PostScript font comes  as a pair of fonts  an outline font for the printer and a corresponding  bitmapped font for displaying type on your screen     No bitmapped font  no menu entry  If your system doesn t have the bitmapped  font  the PostScript font name won t appear in your font menu        Court       The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is designed specifically to work with  PostScript fonts  Even printers that are not PostScript printers can use  PostScript fonts if you have Adobe Type Manager software installed  Adobe  Type Manager uses printer fonts to generate clean looking screen text at any  size   Adobe Type Manager is included with your Color LaserWriter 12 600  PS software      IMPORTANT Adobe Type Manager is not an Apple product  It is made and  supported by Adobe Systems Incorporated  Only the version that comes with  Apple Macintosh system software version 7 5 is 
6.     Click OK and return to the Apple Print Monitor window     Click the Minimize button in the Apple Print Monitor window     Clicking this button shrinks the window to an icon  leaving Apple Print  Monitor running in memory     To set some additional features of the printer software  see    Setting Additional  Printer Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for Windows     later in this  chapter     Repeat these steps on each client computer that will be using Apple Print  Monitor     Making sure everything is working    After you ve configured Apple Print Monitor for Windows  open a Windows  application  Notepad  for example  and print a document  such as the  ReadMe file  to verify that you can print to the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS     Initial Novell NetWare setup    This section provides instructions on setting up the Color LaserWriter 12 600  PS for operation on a Novell NetWare network     Make sure that the NetWare network is set up and operating according to the  instructions in the Novell NetWare documentation     You should have access to the NetWare Printer Console utility  PCONSOLE   on the PC from which you will be setting up the printer and have the  administrative privileges necessary to make changes to the network     Note  The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS automatically determines the  Ethernet frame type used by NetWare for network communications  You do  not need to configure frame type when setting up the printer     Setting Up the Printer for Windows a
7.     In the panel that appears  type a description of the printer   s location     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Set Defaults Update Info      gt  Printer Information      Printer Preferences    gt  Hame    F Location    Type here     Fonts    Disks    Startup Fage    Energy Saving Delay       Click Send     Sending fonts to the printer    You can send additional fonts  sometimes called downloading fonts  to the  printer   s RAM or to the printer   s optional hard disk  You do not have to  download fonts to use them in printed documents  but doing so can make  your documents print more quickly     1 Open the Printer Preferences category   You see a list of preferences   2 Open the Fonts category     The Fonts panel appears     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Set Defaults Update Info     gt  Printer Information      Printer Preferences    ae The icons in the Location  Location   column show where fonts are  stored   in the printer s ROM or    Fonts    Location RAM  orona SCSI hard disk   AyvantGarde Book PostScript  AvantGarde BookObligue PostScript  AvantGarde Derni PostScript HEE   The list shows fonts AvantGarde Bemi0blique PostScript   alread available to Bookman Dermi PostScript  f y Bookman Demiltalic PostScript  the printer  If you see Bookrnan Light PostScript    a font here  you don t qa Ram 12 scsi 0  need to add it        3 Click Add     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users    55    56    4 inthe dialog box that appears  click a font to select it  then click Add     The Fo
8.     Problems covered in other places  For help in clearing a paper jam  see Chapter II     For suggestions to improve the print quality of documents you ve printed  see  Chapter 12     To diagnose and fix problems identified by the status panel on the printer  see  Chapter 10 or Appendix G     243    244    Can t communicate with the printer    If you cannot use the Apple Printer Utility to communicate with the printer   for example  if you inadvertently turn off communication to all ports   you  must reset the configuration switch on the back of the printer     Flip the switch to the left hand position   Then restart the printer and return the  switch to the right hand position                     AM    AN                Can t close the printer   s door    Chapter 13    If something prevents you from closing the door  try these steps     Make sure the transfer drum lever is closed correctly   See the illustration     Anatomy of the Printer    that appears at the beginning of Chapter 1      Make sure the fuser oil cover is closed   Make sure the top cover of the printer is closed     Make sure the disposal box cover is closed     Can t turn the toner carousel    If you press and turn the knob  but the carousel won t turn  press the toner  cartridge firmly to make sure it is installed all the way     Macintosh troubleshooting    If you are using the printer from a Macintosh computer  use this section for  troubleshooting tips     The Chooser does not appear in the Apple      m
9.     m Apple Printer Utility on the Macintosh  see Chapter 2 for details on how to  install and use the program     m Apple Printer Utility for Windows  see Chapter 3 for details on how to  install and use the program     Custom settings for the parallel port    Port Mode Data Protocol   Parallel On AutoSelect  Normal  Raw  TBCP  Compatibility   IDP    Custom settings for the other ports    Port Interface Mode Possible Values   LocalTalk LocalTalk On   Ethernet EtherTalk On or Off  NetWare On or Off  TCP IP On or Off    Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   41    42    What to do next    Chapter 1    How to return to the default settings    To return to the factory default settings  move the configuration switch to the  left hand position and restart the printer  Choose Restart Printer from the  Utilities menu  in the Apple Printer Utility  or turn the printer off and on   Finally  be sure to return the switch to the right hand position     Finish preparing the printer and completing the network connections by  reading one or more of the following chapters     a Chapter 2 explains how to administer the printer on an AppleTalk network  and how to help Macintosh users start using the printer     a Chapter 3 explains how to administer the printer on an Ethernet network and  how to help Windows and NetWare users get started using the printer  It also  explains how to set up a direct connection to an IBM PC or compatible  computer       Chapter 4 explains how to set up the p
10.    A  goes out   D  goes out     As soon as they all go out  the printer has passed the tests  The green  Ready In Use light  O  blinks for about two minutes during warmup  and  then it should glow steadily     If the status lights do not behave this way  the printer needs attention  The  rest of this appendix explains what different lights tell you about the  condition of the printer     Paper Out and Paper Jam lights both flash    If the Paper Out and Paper Jam lights begin flashing  it indicates a hardware  failure  This is an uncommon event  but if it happens  contact your Apple   authorized service provider and report the problem  To help service personnel  diagnose the problem  give them detailed information about the behavior of  the status panel  The illustration below shows you what to report     If the Paper Out and Paper Jam lights blink  the printer has a problem           Report which lights  if any  Report how many lights  if any   are on in this area of the panel  are on in this area of the panel     Two hardware problems you may be able to fix    If you ve recently installed memory in the printer  the SIMMs may be the  source of the problem  For information about diagnosing faulty SIMMs  see     Problem With Internal Random Access Memory  RAM      later in this  appendix     If you ve recently installed a toner cartridge  you may not have seated the  cartridge properly  For information about diagnosing this problem  see     Problem With the Toner Carousel     
11.    First  use a lever inside the fuser access door to pump fuser oil from inside  the printer back into the fuser oil compartment  Then insert a turkey baster or  other blunt syringe into the fuser oil compartment and withdraw the oil     To force fuser oil out of the  printer and back into the  fuser oil compartment  press  and release this lever 50  times  or more  if necessary                                 IMPORTANT Do not use paper towels  tissues  or anything that leaves lint or  debris  It   s better to leave a small amount of oil than to get foreign matter into  the compartment     If you leave oil in the printer  spots may appear on the first 20 to 50 pages  you print after the move     17 Insert the shipping screw into the printer     The screw is encased in a sheath     ay Insert the sheath and turn the screw  with a coin until it is tight                                                                       18 Close the printer   s door   19 Repack the printer in its original packing material     When the printer arrives at its new location  unpack it and set it up as  described in Chapter 1     Packing and Moving the Printer e 301             Appendix F  Replacing the Fuser    When the fuser is near the end of its life  the Alert light and fuser indicator  on the status panel flash to notify you   When the fuser is completely worn  out  the printer stops working   You can purchase a Color LaserWriter Fuser  Replacement Kit from an Apple authorized reseller and f
12.    Use PostScript Level 2 features Tells the driver to use PostScript Level 2  features when printing documents  Use the Level 2 features to speed  printing    Send Data in Binary Tells the driver to send data to the printer in a binary  format  Sending data in binary format may improve the printer   s  performance when printing images or documents containing many  downloadable fonts  The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer can always  receive data in either ASCII or binary format     Send Full Color Data    Tells the driver to print colors on a color printer  Usually  it is best to select this option even when printing to a non color printer   Colors print in finer shades of gray     Match Colors Across Printers    Tells the driver to save color matching  information with the data for use later when the document is saved to a file  for printing on a different PostScript Level 2 printer     Job Timeout Sets the maximum number of seconds that the printer will  spend trying to print a document before canceling the print job  A value of  zero means that the job is never canceled     Wait Timeout Sets the maximum number of seconds that the printer will  wait for Windows to send data before canceling the print job  A value of  zero means that the job is never canceled     Margins Changes the way the printer driver reports the printable area to the  applications you use  The Default option tells the driver to report the  printable area accurately to the applications  The None optio
13.    le  Color LaserWriter  12 600PS    S amp tingup  connecting  and usng your printer      Apple Computer  Inc      1995 Apple Computer  Inc  All rights reserved     Under the copyright laws  this manual may not be copied  in whole or in part  without the  written consent of Apple  Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying  software license agreement     The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer  Inc   registered in the U S  and other  countries  Use of the    keyboard    Apple logo  Option Shift K  for commercial purposes without  the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair  competition in violation of federal and state laws     Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate  Apple is  not responsible for printing or clerical errors     Apple Computer  Inc    1 Infinite Loop   Cupertino  CA 95014 2084   408  996 1010    Apple  the Apple logo  AppleTalk  A UX  ColorSync  EtherTalk  LaserWriter  LocalTalk   Macintosh  PowerBook  QuickTime  and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer  Inc    registered in the U S  and other countries     Finder  QuickDraw  and QuickTake are trademarks of Apple Computer  Inc     Adobe  Adobe Illustrator  Adobe Photoshop  Adobe Type Manager  and PostScript are  trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated  which may be registered in certain jurisdictions     AIX and IBM are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation     C
14.    view and configure the printer   s communication settings   send PostScript files to the printer    restart the printer    lf the network has  zones  click a zone  to select it     Printers in that zone  are listed here     Click the name of the  printer you want     3       Opening the Apple Printer Utility    The Apple Printer Utility has two windows  the Printer Selector window     which is similar to the Chooser  and the printer features window  which you  use to view or change the printer   s settings     Double click the Apple Printer Utility     The Installer puts the Apple Printer Utility in the Apple LaserWriter Software  folder  You can move it wherever you like     In the Printer Selector window that appears  select and open the printer you want     Printer   Selector  AppleTalk cones      Hardware Test Lab  Imaging  Instruments Lab    Japan    Montana  Second Floor    Printers     Dale   s Pro 630  Diane    s Printer  Firebottle  Frank  s Show    Open Printer    Click Open Printer     The printer features window appears     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users    51    52    This category tells  you about the printer  you selected     You can change    some settings in  these categories     Chapter 2    To open a category and display its information and options  click the arrow beside the  category name     LaserWriter 12 600 F     To verify that the printer    received the changes you sent   Printer Information click this button     Printer Preferences  
15.   As you rotate the carousel through all four positions  the tab colors cycle from  magenta  pink  to cyan  blue  to yellow to black     Cartridge carousel cycle    Yellow  Cyan Black  Se tA  Magenta    Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   21    4    5    22 l Chapter 1    Take the toner cartridge out of its packaging and remove the two pieces of packing tape     Choose the toner color that matches the colored tabs beside the opening in  the carousel     Notice the arrow embossed  on the toner cartridge        The color of the toner inside should  show through this small window in the  top of the toner cartridge     Distribute the toner powder     Gently rock the toner  iy  cartridge back and forth   Sy  A  q L     WO             6 To remove the sealing tape  grasp the orange plastic tab and pull it away from the    cartridge        Pull the tape completely out     Insert the toner cartridge into the carousel     Align the arrow on the toner cartridge  with the arrow on the carousel  Then  Slide the toner cartridge into the printer                                                                             Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   23    8    9    After you insert the toner cartridge all the way  push firmly to lock it in place     If you don t press firmly enough to install the cartridge correctly  you wont be  able to rotate the carousel and install another cartridge                                                                                  
16.   Do not stack paper    the back of the cassette  x    higher than this point     Load letterhead  paper face up     Make sure paper fits under  these corner brackets        5       Size guide    Setting this guide indicates to the printer the size of the paper in the cassette     6 Insert the paper cassette into the printer  or into the 250 sheet feeder      Loading Paper    213    Maintenance    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is designed for trouble free service   Maintenance involves putting in a new toner cartridge when a color runs out   replacing the bottle containing fuser oil  and replacing the photoconductor  cartridge and toner disposal box  In addition  there are a few minor cleaning  tasks you may want to perform     The recommended service interval is 60 000 pages to check any service wear  on the fuser and associated parts  This service can be arranged through an  Apple authorized service provider  or you can replace the fuser yourself  For  instructions on replacing the fuser  see Appendix E    IMPORTANT You ll find instructions for replacing toner cartridges  fuser oil   and the photoconductor cartridge and toner disposal box in the packages that  contain the replacement items     215    Safety first    The fuser assembly in the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS operates at very high  temperatures   around 400   F  204   C   Allow the rollers to cool 30 minutes  before performing maintenance and troubleshooting                                   216   Chapter 10    
17.   IBM PC or compatible computer  After you initialize the disk  it will be able  to store font information from Macintosh computers and from IBM PC or  compatible computers  Initializing the disk again from either a Macintosh or  IBM PC or compatible will erase any font information stored there     Your printer   s startup page will not show that a hard disk is installed until you  initialize the hard disk     Installing Options   143    144    Using external hard disks from manufacturers other than Apple    IMPORTANT Some older model hard disk drives may not be compatible with  the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS     If you are considering connecting external hard disks to your printer  keep  these points in mind     m The printer requires SCSI 40 MB  or larger  hard disks      m The printer must be able to tell how much storage space is available on the  disk  This is not possible with some hard disks from manufacturers other  than Apple  You cannot use these disks with the printer         Some non Apple disks have internal SCSI terminators  There should be no  more than one terminator in addition to the one on the printer   s controller  board  one on the first device in the chain and one on the last device      a The hard disk must be able to deliver at least 5 volts of termination power     Increasing the printer RAM    Chapter 5    The printer comes with 8 MB of RAM soldered on the controller board and a  4 MB SIMM in one of the two slots on the board  You can increase the 
18.   It   s important not to let lint  or dust interfere with the operation of the printer  Take time to clean the  paper pickup area occasionally                                          Wipe the area with a  clean  dry  lint free cloth              Clearing Paper jams    This chapter provides solutions to problems you may encounter with paper  jams while using your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  The first section  discusses how to read the printer   s indicator lights to help you identify the  approximate locations of paper jams  The second section shows the steps for  clearing paper jams     227    228    Checking the indicator lights for paper jams    Chapter 11    When paper is jammed somewhere in the printer  the Paper Jam light glows  orange  and lights on the status panel indicate the location of access doors  near the paper jam                          The lights on this diagram identify Paper Jam light  the access doors nearest the paper jam     If you see other lights flashing  see Chapter 10 or Appendix G for  information about the status panel       If you have connected an external hard disk  make sure it   s turned on     a Check the technical specifications of the hard disk to make sure it supplies  at least 5 volts of termination power     Checking for and clearing paper jams    Paper jams can occur in three areas in the printer       where paper goes into the printer  pickup area and paper cassette     where printing happens  transfer drum         where paper com
19.   Loading the optional 250 sheet universal cassette 211    Maintenance 215  Safety first 216  Precautions during maintenance 217  Regular maintenance 218  Low toner 218  Low fuser oil 219  Toner disposal box is full 220  Photoconductor cartridge is wearing out 221  Fuser needs replacement 222    Cleaning the exterior 222    Cleaning the density sensor and separation discharger wire    Cleaning the paper pickup area 226    207    223    Contents   xiii    Xiv    Contents    11    12    18    Clearing Paper Jams 227   Checking the indicator lights for paper jams 228   Checking for and clearing paper jams 229  Clearing paper from the paper pickup area 230  Clearing paper from the transfer drum 233  Clearing paper from the fuser 234  Clearing paper from the optional feeder 236    Fixing Image Problems 237  General print quality problems 237  Color print quality problems 241    Troubleshooting 243   Problems covered in other places 243   Cant communicate with the printer 244   Can t close the printers door 244   Can t turn the toner carousel 245   Macintosh troubleshooting 245   IBM PC or compatible troubleshooting 249  Novell NetWare troubleshooting 251   UNIX troubleshooting 251   Density control panel 254    Part Ill    Appendixes    A Technical Information and Printer Supplies 257    Specifications 257   About PostScript Printer Description  PPD  files 263  RAM Upgrade Specifications 265   Ozone emission 265   Communication settings 266   Accessories 26 7   Supplies 268    Set
20.   Port Network interface Computer  LocalTalk AppleTalk Macintosh  Ethernet AppleTalk  EtherTalk  Macintosh  Novell NetWare DOS and Windows  Novell ATPS Macintosh  TCP IP Macintosh  DOS and Windows  UNIX  Parallel IEEE 1284 ECP DOS and Windows    Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   29    30    Chapter 1    Connecting to an Ethernet network    A single Ethernet cable can carry a number of network protocols  including  AppleTalk  sometimes called EtherTalk when it   s on an Ethernet network    Novell NetWare  and TCP IP  To connect the printer to an Ethernet network  running any combination of these protocols  follow these steps     Obtain an Ethernet transceiver and a length of Ethernet cable appropriate for your  network   s media type   thin  AUI  or twisted pair                                                                          Apple Ethernet Apple Ethernet Apple Ethernet  thin coaxial transceiver AUI adapter twisted pair transceiver    Note  These Apple transceivers are self terminating  Do not add a terminator  to the end of the network  If you re not using Apple network devices  check  the instructions that came with the transceivers you are using     Plug the short cable from the transceiver into the Ethernet port   lt   gt   on the printer     Connect the printer to the Ethernet network in one of these three ways     To connect the printer to the end of an Ethernet network  use the Ethernet  cable to connect the empty socket of the nearest device s transc
21.   jnter pre ters  other settings shown here     FostScript Level 2 Version  2014 108       You see a list of printer information     Naming the printer    To help users easily select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer from their  computers  give the printer a unique name based  for example  on its location  or the group of users who commonly share it  You can name or rename any  laser printer on the AppleTalk network     IMPORTANT Be sure to tell users what the printer name is and what zone it   s  located in when you install the printer software on their computers or instruct  them to do so     Open the Printer Preferences category   You see a list of preferences     Open the Name category     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users    53    54    Chapter 2       In the panel that appears  type a new name     When the panel opens  it shows the selected printers current name     LaserWriter 12 600 F     Set Defaults Update Info      Printer Information        Printer Preferences    ed Hame    Type a new name here     AppleTalk Mare   Color Printer for Austin    Note  A non standard character in the name will appear correctly on the  Macintosh  but the printer may print a different character on its startup    To send the new name setting to the printer  click Send     Identifying the printer s physical location   You can type a description of the printer   s location    Open the Printer Preferences category    You see a list of preferences    Open the Location category
22.   load atps    This command instructs the NetWare server to load the ATPS service  automatically at startup time     Press Esc until the Install utility quits   At the system console prompt  type load atps and press Enter     The service is loaded and immediately becomes available to network users   A message appears confirming the loading  and the console returns to the  command line prompt     Setting up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer    271    272    Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 3 x server    Appendix B    If you are setting up the printer for access by Macintosh computers on a  NetWare 3 x network and this is the first time you are configuring ATPS   follow these instructions     You can configure ATPS from the server console or by running RCONSOLE   remote console  from a client computer     At the console prompt  type    load install  The Install utility starts  and a list of Installation Options appears   Select Product Options from the list and press Enter     A list of product options appears  If the Macintosh NLM is installed and  operating properly  a NW MAC option will be available     Select the NW MAC option and press Enter    A list of configuration files appears    From the list  select the file SYS  SYSTEM ATPS CFG and press Enter   A prompt appears  asking if you want to create a new file   Type y and press Enter     An empty window appears  providing an area in which to enter configuration  information     10    11  12  13    Ente
23.   to the printer     Security    You can limit printer access to hosts  and networks of hosts  that you specify   See    Changing TCP IP Configurations    in Chapter 2  if you re using the  Apple Printer Utility on a Macintosh  or Chapter 3 if you re using the Apple  Printer Utility for Windows     Step 1  Installing the software the printer administrator needs    You don   t need to install any special UNIX software to administer the printer   To control printer features  you can use the Apple Printer Utility program on  Macintosh computers  see Chapter 2  or Apple Printer Utility for Windows   see Chapter 3  on IBM PC or compatible computers     Step 2  Obtaining an IP address for the printer    To be recognized on your TCP IP network  your printer must be assigned an  IP address  Part of the address identifies your site  the other part uniquely  identifies the device  Most sites have a network administrator who dispenses  IP addresses for all new network devices  Contact your network administrator  for an IP address for the printer     WARNING If your TCP IP network contains devices with duplicate or  incorrect IP addresses  you may experience unpredictable network  behavior  or your network may cease to function  Make sure you obtain  a valid and unique IP address for the printer     Step 3  Assigning an IP address to the printer    When you unpack the printer  it has a unique permanent factory assigned  Ethernet address  but no IP address  To assign an IP address to the 
24.   wraps around the transfer drum  The paper is clipped onto the transfer  drum at one end and held around the drum by an electrostatic charge      m When all applicable colors have been applied  the paper  released from the  transfer drum  exits through the hot fixing assembly rollers and out to the  top tray or face up tray     True 600 dpi printer    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is a true 600 dpi printer because every  aspect of its architecture is designed to a 600 dpi specification  In addition  its  multilevel capability can assign levels of color or gray  rather than simply on  or off  to each pixel  thereby further enhancing print quality     Printer fonts    The following fonts are resident in the printer ROM     a   AvantGarde Book  AvantGarde BookOblique  AvantGarde Demi   AvantGarde DemiOblique       Bookman Demi  Bookman Demiltalic  Bookman Light  Bookman  LightItalic      Courier  Courier Bold  Courier BoldOblique  Courier Oblique      Helvetica  Helvetica Bold  Helvetica BoldOblique  Helvetica Narrow   Helvetica Narrow Bold  Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique  Helvetica Narrow  Oblique  Helvetica Oblique    a Helvetica Condensed  Helvetica Condensed Bold  Helvetica Condensed  BoldOblique  Helvetica Condensed Oblique    m NewCentury Schoolbook Bold  NewCentury Schoolbook BoldItalic   NewCentury Schoolbook Italic  NewCentury Schoolbook Roman        Palatino Bold  Palatino BoldItalic  Palatino Italic  Palatino Roman        Symbol    Technical Information and Printer S
25.  105 108  Apple Printer Utility  Macintosh  66 71  communication settings  adjusting customizing 40   42  Macintosh 70 71  Windows 107 108  factory default settings 266  configuration switch  changing communication settings  Macintosh 70  Windows 107  illustration 2  29  resetting after communication was  turned off 244  resetting to standard communication  settings 41  42  configuring specific UNIX systems  121 128  configuring the printer  See Apple Printer  Utility for Windows  Apple  Printer Utility  Macintosh   ATPS operating mode   TCP IP network  Connect dialog box  Windows 197 199  connecting hard disks 137   144  connecting the printer  to a LocalTalk network 32 33  to an Ethernet network 30 32  to an IBM PC or compatible computer  35 36  to a single Macintosh 34 35  ports and 29  turning on the power 37 39  conserving energy 39  See also  energy saving mode  controller board  removing replacing  140 143  145 149  controller specifications 258    Index   341    342    Index    copies  specifying number to print  Macintosh 164  Windows 181  cover page  printing  Macintosh 165  Custom Installation of printer software   Windows 79  81  174  177  Custom Install of printer software   Macintosh 46  158  customizing communication settings 41    D    default communication settings  resetting  41 42  default printer  changing 161  De Install of printer software  Windows  79  174  demonstration page  turning on or off  Macintosh 59  Windows 102  density control panel 254  dens
26.  141    7     Remove the three screws from the controller board and discard them        8                Attach the cable here     9 Secure the brackets on the hard disk to the controller board with the three screws that  came in the package with the hard disk     10 Remove and discard the grounding wrist strap     You ve now installed the hard disk  You need only replace the controller board  to complete the installation     11 Grasp the controller board by its metal frame and slide it back into the printer     142   Chapter 5    12 Replace the two screws that hold the controller board in place                       You ve completed installing a hard disk in the printer  Next you must initialize  the hard disk before you can use it     Initializing hard disks    After connecting an external or internal hard disk to the printer  you must  initialize the disk before you can use it  Macintosh external hard disks already  initialized in the HFS format can be used as is with the printer     If you have a Macintosh  you can use the Apple Printer Utility to initialize a  hard disk connected to the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  See    Initializing a  Hard Disk Connected to the Printer    in Chapter 2  If you use an IBM PC or  compatible computer  use the Font Downloader in the Windows Setup dialog  box to initialize a hard disk  See Chapter 7 for more information about  initializing disks and downloading fonts     IMPORTANT Initialize a hard disk only once from a Macintosh or from an
27.  209  211  on universal cassette 211  Windows  See also Apple Printer Utility  for Windows  IBM PC or  compatible computers   Windows NT    adding a hard disk to the device list  193 194  configuring printer software for new  options 150  152  downloading fonts 109 110  190 192  Features settings  printer Setup 186  Fonts settings  printer Setup 184  initializing a hard disk connected to  the printer 195  installing printer software  78 81  174 176  Job Control settings   printer Setup 187  Paper settings  printer Setup 180 181  PostScript settings  printer Setup  182 183  197  printer Setup dialog box  opening  178 179  printing from 178  printing to a PostScript file 196 199  printing transparencies 181  186  specifying a different port 80  175  tray switching 186  Watermark settings  printer Setup  188 190  Windows DOS computers  See Apple  Printer Utility for Windows   IBM PC or compatible  computers  Windows  Windows NT  installing the PostScript Printer  Description file for 81  177  printing from 178  Windows Program Manager  79  174 175  write protecting disks 78  174    Z    zones  See network zones    Index   357    The Apple Publishing System    This Apple manual was written  edited  and produced on a desktop publishing system using  Apple Macintosh computers and QuarkXPress  Technical illustrations were drawn in Adobe     Illustrator  screen shots were created and modified with system software  ExposurePro  Aldus  SuperPaint  and Adobe Photoshop  Proof pages were 
28.  6    E    Chicago       You can apply a style to a font like this by making a choice from the  appropriate menu  Fonts  Style  Format  or some similar menu  depending on  the application program   A font predesigned with a given style nearly always  looks better than a font with a computer generated    derived    style     About style names  Predesigned styled fonts sometimes have names you may  not be familiar with  For example  roman refers to a font without styling  or  plain  Oblique is similar to italic  Light  demi  and extra are different states   of bold     Using Fonts With the Printer 287    288    Common questions about fonts    Appendix C    Here are some questions that often come up about fonts   What kind of fonts should   buy     Bitmapped fonts are best for screen display but don t look as good when you  print them  PostScript fonts look great on paper if you have a PostScript  printer or Adobe Type Manager     TrueType fonts are the best all purpose fonts to use for your Macintosh  monitor and non PostScript printers  If you need to display fonts with  extremely accurate typographic features such as ligatures and kerning  install  QuickDraw GX on your system and buy QuickDraw GX TrueType fonts     Why don   t all of my fonts appear in the Fonts menu     You may not have all of your fonts placed correctly  In system software  versions 7 1 and 7 5  all the fonts should be installed in the Fonts folder in the  System Folder     Additionally  some application pr
29.  DOS and Windows Direct connection by a parallel cable  oe i PETELE EERE N E T E e eee   ne AEE TES  E ee pees     EE _ a   ne Taraa por i ne    or Ethernet cables    How Much of This Book Do   Have to Read      xxi    xxii    Preface    Step 3  Set additional printer parameters     The administrative tools provided with the printer are described in detail in  Chapters 2 and 3     Chapter Computer Utility name  Chapter 2 Macintosh Apple Printer Utility  Chapter 3 Windows Apple Printer Utility for Windows    Though the Apple Printer Utility runs on Macintosh computers and the  Apple Printer Utility for Windows runs on Windows computers  both utilities  can be used to set additional printer parameters that affect all users     Step 4  Add any hardware options   Chapter 5 explains how to add any of the hardware options you may have  purchased for the printer  including      internal or external hard disks  for storing Macintosh and Windows  downloadable fonts      extra memory  for printing documents that contain many fonts  more quickly      paper handling options  the 250 sheet feeder with universal cassette     Step 5  Help new users get started     Part II of the manual contains information for people who plan to use  as  opposed to administer  the printer  Information about the administrator s  responsibilities is in Part I     User   s computer Where to find information    Macintosh Chapter 2 explains the administrator   s responsibilities   Chapter 6 explains how the user
30.  IMPORTANT If the printer is on a network  make sure no one is attempting to  use the printer when you restart it  If someone s printing job is canceled  they  must resubmit it     Getting Macintosh users started using the printer    As soon as you connect the printer to the network  it   s ready to use  In  preparing to print on it  Macintosh users follow the same basic steps that you  did to install the software and set up the printer  Each user      installs the printer software and fonts on the Macintosh      selects and sets up the printer from the Chooser    Instructions for users    Chapter 6 explains to users how to install the software from the disks that  came with the printer    In addition  you ll need to give users information specific to your network   a the name of the AppleTalk zone on which the printer is located      the name you gave the printer if you renamed it with the Apple Printer  Utility  Software for users    If youd prefer not to pass around the software disks  you can place the  software on a server  as explained in the next section  If you prefer  you can of  course install the software on each user   s computer yourself     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   73    14    Chapter 2    Preparing a server so users can install over a network    If you want users to install their software from a network server rather than  pass around the original Macintosh floppy disks  you must copy the disks to a  server as follows     Create a new folder
31.  Information    Printer Preferences  Hame  Location    Fonts    Location    AvantGarde Book PostScript   AvantGarde BookOblique PostSeript   AvantGarde Demi PostScript   Click a font AvantGarde DemiOblique PostScript    Bookman Derni PostSeoript   to select It  Bookman Derniltalic PostScript    Bookman Light PostScript    fr RaM i2  lt  lt  SCSI o    4 Click Remove     Printing font samples    Update Info    Remove       The icons in the Location  column show where fonts are  stored   in the printer s ROM or  RAM  or on a SCSI hard disk     You cannot remove fonts from  the printer s ROM     You can print a list of the fonts currently stored in the printer   s memory  both  RAM and ROM  and on optional hard disks attached to the printer       Choose Print Font Samples from the File menu     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   57    58    Select the disk you  want to initialize     Chapter 2    Initializing a hard disk connected to the printer    If you connect an internal or external hard disk to the printer  you need to  initialize the disk before you can download fonts to it   See Chapter 5 for  information about connecting hard disks to the printer      The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer recognizes disks formatted for use  with the Macintosh hierarchical file system  HFS  format  The printer will  not recognize disks using other formats  If you connect a disk that is not  formatted for HFS  you will need to reinitialize the disk and then reload any  fonts fro
32.  LaserWriter 8 icon  Click the Setup button   then click Auto Setup in the dialog box that appears     Background printing is disabled    If the Chooser shows background printing turned off  and the buttons are  dimmed so you can   t turn it on again  PrintMonitor has probably been  removed from the Extensions folder  On the disks that came with your  Macintosh  find the PrintMonitor and drag it to the System Folder on your  computer   You need the original PrintMonitor along with Desktop  PrintMonitor in the Extensions folder      Troubleshooting   247    248    Chapter 13    Nothing is printed  no paper comes out of the printer     Try the following steps     Make sure the printer is turned on     If you are using background printing  check for error messages    Double click the desktop icon for the printer youre using      If you have several printer icons on your desktop  make sure the one you  printed to is the same as the one where youre looking for the printed  document     Try printing again  but select the Print Detailed Report option   Choose the  Print command  click the Options button  then choose the Print Detailed  Report from the PostScript Errors pop up menu      Check the Chooser to be sure the printer is selected  Be sure to select the  printer   s name  as well as the LaserWriter 8 icon and  if necessary  the  AppleTalk network zone     Check the Paper Out light  If it is on  add paper and replace the paper  cassette  If it is blinking  make sure the paper 
33.  M Switch setting as  the printer s default  setting  click Save     Choose On  Off  or Printer   s Default    You select the default   automatic tray switching  on or off   in the Apple Printer Utility     Printing transparencies    When you want to print transparencies  choose the Print command and click  the Options button in the Print dialog box  Then choose Transparency from  the Paper Type menu in the Print Options dialog box     A page you print as a transparency looks different from the same page printed  on paper  You can see bigger dots of color on the transparency film  This kind  of printed image looks best when projected on a screen     Changing the Print Quality mode    The Print Quality pop up menu offers these choices    m Normal for speed and good quality for most purposes     Best for improved registration  needed only for special printing jobs   m Printers Default for when you use the Apple Printer Utility  in the Job    Defaults category  Imaging Options panel  to make the choice    Choose Print from the File menu  or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and  drop it on the printer      In the Print dialog box  make the selections you want   Click Options     In the Print Options dialog box  choose Normal  Best  or Printer   s Default from the Tray  Switch pop up menu     Print Options  Cover Page     None  O Before  O After Document    Print   Color Grayscale w    Printers Profiie   Prinfe s Hofa       Tray Switch  _ Printer   s default        Pr
34.  NT Printer Software     Make sure the other  checkboxes are deselected  then follow these steps     1 Click Install  Instructions for installing the Windows NT software appear   2 Click Continue  The Print Manager appears     3 Choose Create Printer from the Print Manager   s Printer menu  The Create Printer dialog  box appears     4     Select Other  at the bottom of the list  in the Driver Combo box   5 Insert Printer Disk 3 for Windows in the floppy disk drive     6 Make sure the correct floppy disk drive is indicated in the Install Driver dialog box and  click OK  A list of printer drivers appears     7 Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer and click OK     8 Follow the instructions on the screen  and click Continue and OK to complete the  installation     Using Apple Print Monitor  You can monitor your print jobs on an Ethernet network with Apple Print  Monitor for Windows  Here are a few points to note     a Apple Print Monitor for Windows lets print jobs be sent directly to the  printer over the network  Apple Print Monitor is easy to use and makes a  NetWare print server  but not a NetWare file server  unnecessary         Apple Print Monitor can be used only on systems with Windows 3 1 or 3 11   or Windows for Workgroups 3 1 or 3 11      m Apple Print Monitor coexists with NetWare     You can also monitor your print jobs over a direct parallel connection with  Apple Print Monitor  see the instructions in the next section  If you want to  use NetW
35.  NetWare 3 x  the menus and commands will differ  somewhat     Specifying a print server    Your first task is to start PCONSOLE and specify the Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS as the print server     Log in to a file server from DOS on a client computer     IMPORTANT You must have supervisor or equivalent privileges to create a print  server     At the DOS prompt  type PCONSOLE and press Enter   The utility starts   Press F4     This changes PCONSOLE to bindery mode  and the Available Options menu  appears  displaying printer console options     Print Queues  Print Servers  Quick Setup    Change Current NetWare Server    Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   87    88    Chapter 3    Use the arrow keys to highlight Print Servers in the menu  and press Enter   If available  a list of print servers appears     Example    APPLE _LW6C4B3D  APPLE _LWF40B99  APPLE _LWF40B8D  APPLE _LWF40BE9    Press Ins  then type the NetWare printer name  provided on the printer   s startup page   and press Enter     The last six digits in the NetWare printer name are from the printer   s Ethernet  address     The new name now appears in the list of available print servers     IMPORTANT If multiple file servers are to be serviced by a single printer  this  name must be the same on each file server     Assigning the operating mode    Now that you   ve named the printer in PCONSOLE  you assign PPERVER  mode to the printer by specifying the mode and the name you want to assign  to the p
36.  Press the toner cartridge  until it snaps into place     Repeat steps 2 through 8 until you   ve installed all four toner cartridges     The process is essentially the same for each cartridge     Wait to install the printer options    24   Chapter 1    If you purchased any of the following options  wait to install them until  youve connected the printer to your network       internal or external hard disks      memory  a 250 sheet feeder    By waiting  you can ensure the printer is working correctly  thus simplifying  troubleshooting  before you add the options     Loading paper into the paper cassette    You can load paper into the paper cassette or the multipurpose tray  or both   For instructions on using the multipurpose tray  see Chapter 9                          The multipurpose tray  holds up to 100 sheets of  paper or 50 transparencies     J    You can also use the tray for  The paper cassette holds up to 250 sheets manual feed printing     of paper  With the optional universal cassette  you  can load U S  letter  A4  B5  or legal size paper     You can expect excellent printing results from photocopier paper  For best  results  use paper labeled    laser quality         For paper specifications  see  Appendix A      Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   25    1 Slide the paper cassette out of the printer                                                     Grasp the handle  squeeze to  release the latch  lift and pull the cassette out     2 Prepare a stack of
37.  Problem with the toner carousel 334    Removing the Macintosh Desktop Printing Software 335    Monitoring and controlling print requests without desktop printers 337    Index 339    Communications regulation information    FCC statement    This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device  in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules  See instructions if interference to  radio or television reception is suspected     Radio and television interference    The equipment described in this manual generates  uses  and can radiate radio frequency  energy  If it is not installed and used properly   that is  in strict accordance with Apple   s  instructions   it may cause interference with radio and television reception     This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device  in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules  These specifications are designed  to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation  However   there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation     You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off  If  the interference stops  it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices     If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception  try to correct  the interference by using one or mor
38.  Users   123    124    Chapter 4    10  11    Select the following options  in order  from the SAM menu     Printers and Plotters    Printers Plotters    Actions    Add a Remote Printer  Do not select    Add a Network Printer         A form appears for you to define a remote printer     Enter information into the remote printer form as follows     Printer queue name Type the local queue name users will use as the name  for the printer     Remote system name Type the IP name assigned to the printer as described  in    Step 3  Assigning an IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter     Remote printer queue name Type the local queue name users will use as the  name for the printer     Remote cancel model Used for remote printer job removal  type rcmodel  Remote status model Used for remote printer queue status  type rsmodel  Printer class Optional    Make this the system default printer  Check the box to make this printer the  default printer for all workstations on this segment of the network     Allow anyone to cancel requests Check this box if anyone should be able to  cancel requests     Remote printer on a BSD system   y orn  Because this printer is a Berkeley   style remote printer  check this box     Select the OK button     When you see the message    Task completed     select OK     Pull down the Lists menu and select Exit     Select the Exit SAM button     Test printing with the following command     lp  da printer_queue_name filename    If the test print do
39.  Watermark tab dialog box     Select a Watermark Lists available watermark definitions  which can be  selected and edited or deleted     Edit Displays the Edit Watermark dialog box  summarized below     Add Displays the Add Watermark dialog box  which has the same features  as the Edit Watermark dialog box  summarized below     Delete Deletes the selected watermark definition     Display area A bitmap area that displays a portrait image of what the page  will look like when printed     Edit Watermark    Choose the Edit button in the Watermark tab dialog box to display the Edit  Watermark dialog box     Edit Y  atermark        Watermark Text    Text AMENE CUENE  Font  ail Cd  se 2 a sue  ow E     Print in Foreground  Print Outline Only            Angle        i          44  i o    45    90      l   90    45       r  Position         Automatically Center Watermark       r Color   lt  Position Relative to Center    Red  Green  Blue  Choose Color      a a      Je Da JA ba le Do SE                               The following settings are available in the Edit Watermark dialog box     Text Displays the text of the selected watermark for editing     Font Lists all TrueType and ATM fonts and the 13 base PostScript fonts    that either reside in the printer or can be downloaded to the printer   a Size Lets you specify a font size between 7 and 600 points   a Style Lets you specify a font style  Regular  Bold  Italic  and Bold Italic  as    available     a Printin Foreground    Tells t
40.  With this feature on  the printer keeps the connection open until the last page  of a job has printed  That way  if a problem develops at the end of the print  job  the printer can send error messages to alert users to the problem  Turning  the feature on does make the total print time for the job somewhat longer   Also  jobs are not overlapped  that is  multiple jobs are printed serially     To send the settings to the printer  click Send     Viewing the Ethernet address   You can view the printer   s Ethernet address when needed   Open the Communication Configuration category    You see a list of communication settings options    Open the Ethernet Address category     The printer   s Ethernet address appears     Working with a NetWare network    If the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is connected to a NetWare network  you  can use the Apple Printer Utility for Windows to configure NetWare settings  in the printer     Open the Communication Configuration category   You see a list of communication settings options   Open the NetWare Configuration category     What you see in the panel depends on whether you have set up the printer as  a remote printer  RPRINTER  or a print server  PSERVER  in NetWare    For the NetWare RPRINTER setup    a Click the RPRINTER checkbox      Type the printers name     a Click Send to send the changes to the printer     For the NetWare PSERVER setup   m Click the PSERVER checkbox     a Type the printers name and PSERVER password  as assigned in NetWa
41.  above is an Apple product  part number M1657Z A  and  comes with RJ 11 connectors  Apple also produces another LocalTalk kit with  different connectors  part number M2068LL B      Plug the connector box into the LocalTalk port  Jt  on the printer     3 Connect the printer to the network in one of these two ways     a To connect the printer to the end of a LocalTalk network  use the LocalTalk  cable to connect the empty socket of the nearest device   s connector box to  the printer   s connector box                                                                                               a To connect the printer between two devices on a LocalTalk network   disconnect one LocalTalk cable from the connector box of the device  immediately to the left or right of the printer and plug it into the new  printer   s connector box  Then use the new LocalTalk cable to connect the  free socket on the printer   s connector box to the socket you freed on the  other device   s connector box                                                                                                                               What to do after connecting to a LocalTalk network  m To connect the printer directly to a single Macintosh or to an IBM PC or  compatible computer  see the appropriate sections later in this chapter     m If youre finished connecting the printer  skip to    Adjusting Communication  Settings     later in this chapter     For more information about setting up the printer on a 
42.  cleaning unit  a separation discharger  an ozone filter  and an  air filter     Cleaning the exterior    Unplug the power cord and then wipe the exterior of the printer with a clean   dry towel or lint free paper  Don t allow lint or foreign liquids inside the  printer     Use a mild soap or detergent if necessary  but never use an ammonia based  cleaner  Be careful not to get any liquid in the power cord port or anywhere  inside the printer     WARNING Never use ammonia based cleaners on or around the Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS  They may react chemically with the toner and  with the printer   s plastic case     Cleaning the density sensor and separation discharger wire    Clean the density sensor and separation discharger wire regularly to keep the    printer running smoothly     Open the printer   s door and top cover and remove the cleaning tool from its clips                                      Maintenance   223    224      N    Lightly brush off any dust that may have settled on the sensors                                                  3 Position the felt tips on either side of the separation discharger wire and run the tool  along the wire once or twice                                                  4 Replace the tool in its clips  close the top cover  and close the printer   s door     226    Chapter 10    Cleaning the paper pickup area    The paper pickup mechanism handles a lot of paper  Dust from the paper can  accumulate on the rollers and on the mechanism
43.  connection  once again type the ping command from a workstation on the  same subnet as the printer     ping printer_IP_name    If the ping command responds by telling you that the printer is alive on the  network  the address assignment was successful     If the ping command does not respond  or tells you the printer was not  found  then the address assignment failed  Try the steps in this procedure  again  making sure you type the printer   s Ethernet address exactly as it  appears on the startup page  If it still doesn   t work  see the troubleshooting  suggestions in Chapter 13     Skip to    Step 4  Making Sure Everything Is Working     later in this chapter     Printer IP address assignment  option B  Using Macintosh or Windows utilities    If you have a Macintosh computer connected to the printer  you can use the  Apple Printer Utility to assign the printer   s IP address  as described in  Chapter 2     If you have a Windows computer connected to the printer  you can use the  Apple Printer Utility for Windows to assign the printer   s IP address  as  described in Chapter 3     After you have assigned the printer   s IP address  skip to    Step 4  Making Sure  Everything Is Working     later in this chapter     Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users   115    116    Chapter 4    Printer IP address assignment  option C  Using a BOOTP or RARP server  Note  This method works only if the printer has not been assigned an IP  address     If your network has a BOOTP server or RA
44.  define a remote printer     Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users   121    122    Chapter 4    10  11    12    Enter information into the remote printer form  as follows       Printer queue name Type the local queue name users will use as the name for  the printer         Remote system name Type the IP name assigned to the printer as described  in    Step 3  Assigning an IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter         Remote printer queue name Type the local queue name users will use as the  name for the printer       Remote cancel model Used for remote printer job removal  type rcmodel    Remote status model Used for remote printer queue status  type rsmodel    a Make this the system default printer   y or n  Type y to make this printer the  default printer for all workstations on this segment of the network       Printer class Optional     Restrict cancel Optional       Remote printer on a BSD system   y or n  Because this printer is a Berkeley   style remote printer  type y   Choose Perform Task from the SAM menu    To enable the print queue you just created  choose the following items from the SAM   menu  in order    Peripheral Devices   Printers and Plotters   Enable a Printer    When SAM asks for the printer name  type the IP name assigned to the printer as  described in    Step 3  Assigning an IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter     Leave SAM     Start the LP request scheduler by typing   usr lib lpsched    Test printing with the follow
45.  disposal Transfer Paper pickup  paper cassette box cover drum lever Power switch access door  Back view Density control Parallel port Ethernet port    pang LocalTalk port    SCSI port                      Configuration switch       Multipurpose  tray access door                                           AW    Face up output tray  access door             CTU                Power cord receptacle    Chapter 1    Choosing a place for the printer    Choose a flat  stable area with adequate room around the printer  The area  should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat   cold  or humidity   Abrupt changes in temperature and extremely high or low  humidity can adversely affect print quality      Don t put the printer near devices that produce magnetic fields  Don t use  ammonia based cleaners  which can react chemically with the toner and the  plastic  on or around the printer   For instructions on cleaning the printer  see  Chapter 10      IMPORTANT The printer weighs approximately 110 pounds  approximately 50  kilograms   Make sure you place it on a desk or table that   s strong enough to  hold the weight  Don   t lift the printer by yourself  Have at least one other  person assist you     Allow space to open the top  for clearing paper jams     Allow space for air  flow around the fan     Allow enough space  to open the door                                    The Apple logo marks  the front of the printer                             Make sure you ha
46.  gets started and how to print   Chapter 9 explains how to load paper   Chapter 10 explains routine maintenance   Chapters 11  12  and 13 explain how to fix problems with the printer   a ve  Dos OIN ar oor ener nea   mee AE E  Chapter 7 explains how the user gets started and how to print   Chapter 9 explains how to load paper   Chapter 10 explains routine maintenance   Chapters 11  12  and 13 explain how to fix problems with the printer   UNX Chapter 4 explains the administrator s responsibilities     Chapter 8 explains how the user gets started and how to print   Chapter 9 explains how to load paper   Chapter 10 explains routine maintenance     Chapters 11  12  and 13 explain how to fix problems with the printer     Solving problems    For paper jam problems  see Chapter 11     For image problems  see Chapter 12     m For other troubleshooting  see Chapter 13 and Appendix G     How Much of This Book Do I Have to Read    xxiii    Guide for Printer  Administrators  Chapter 1 Setting Up the   Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Chapter 2 Setting Up the Printer for  Macintosh Users    Chapter 3 Setting Up the Printer for  Windows and NetWare Users    Chapter 4 Setting Up the Printer for  UNIX Users    Chapter 5 Installing Options  Part   of this book provides the information you need  to set up the printer for your workgroup     lf you want to use a printer that has already been set  up  see Part Il           Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Main features of the Color La
47.  instructions on using Adobe Type Manager  for example to install or  remove Type 1 fonts  see    Installed Type 1 Fonts and Adobe Type Manager      in Chapter 3     Exit from the installer     If youre not going to use NetWare or your computer is connected directly to  the printer by a parallel cable  click Close  If your computer is connected to  the printer over a NetWare network  follow these steps     a From Windows  click Control Panel    a Click Printers    a Click Connect  The Connect dialog box opens    a Click Network  The NetWare Printer Connections dialog box opens   a Select the queue and the port the printer is assigned to    a Click Capture and click Close to close the dialog box     a Highlight the queue and port combination you specified earlier and  click OK     a In the Printers control panel  set the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer  as the default printer and click Close     Note  If you don   t already have your NetWare queues set up  go to    Initial  Novell NetWare Setup     in Chapter 3  when you finish installing the software     What to do next    The PostScript Printer Driver and other software are now installed  To learn  to use the PostScript Printer Driver  turn to    Printing From Windows  Applications     later in this chapter     Installing software for Windows NT    The steps to install the PostScript Printer Description  PPD  file for the Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS  or other Apple printer  on a Windows NT system are  similar to those i
48.  memory size to a total of 40 MB  maximum  by installing up to 32 additional  MB of RAM in the printer     Adding RAM improves performance  allows more fonts to be downloaded to  the printer at one time  provides more space to store the calculations needed  for large or complex images  and increases the space available for font  caching  or maintaining recently used fonts in memory for faster access the  next time they are needed  Additional RAM also improves the image quality  of documents printed on legal size paper     IMPORTANT The instructions provided here explain how to install added  memory in your printer yourself  If you wish  you can also contact an Apple   authorized dealer to install more memory for a service fee     You can purchase additional RAM for the printer in units of 1  4  and 16 MB  SIMMs  You can also purchase RAM expansion kits from many electronics  and computer outlets  For information about the RAM specifications required  to expand your printer   s memory  see Appendix A     IMPORTANT The RAM used in the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is not the  same type of RAM used in earlier LaserWriter II printers  The two are not  interchangeable     WARNING Refrain from handling the memory until you have put on   a grounding wrist strap  Handling the memory without wearing a  grounding strap may allow static electricity to be discharged into   the memory and damage it  If you don   t have a grounding wrist strap  be  sure to purchase one from a computer dealer
49.  off                       abe wate    A  2a RA      e    N    M   i  A Y  Ir A  R  Oj       XX   A  Y                J     ax  J  Y  aS  e            V       Appendix F    10 To slide the fuser unit out of the printer  pull both knobs        i                 ULUS                Wa es    Wa        G  i    Y             To remove the fuser  insert your hands into the pockets and lift     11                       Ss       j             ta    ee           k    i SAO IY  ACG    E A    Y          ETA  IZA                D          Yi    kl A    spills  clean it up immediately     IMPORTANT Dont drop the fuser  If any oil     The oil is very slippery      Replacing the Fuser    Unpack the new fuser and remove all the packing materials     12    Lower the new fuser into place in the printer     13                            Push the fuser back into the printer     14    Push firmly  If the fuser isn t all the way in  you wont be able to tighten the    two locking screws                  T  7  a    Wy          Li A  B                      Appendix F    With the screwdriver  tighten the two locking screws     15       Ge       hg d   e  eo L  AA                   YAN    Fa  PAR  AN    es     e V  ver  lA  v  A               A K S  K                            If the screws won t tighten and lock  the fuser isn   t in far enough  Push    it firmly     Replacing the Fuser    Reattach the fuser access door     16          AW    A    dS                        io    eal    WAN i  J  1 d  
50.  oil come in the package with the new  bottle of fuser oil     Maintenance   219    220    Chapter 10    Toner disposal box is full    When the toner disposal box is full  the Alert and toner disposal lights blink   and the printer stops working   For information about ordering the  replacement supplies  see Appendix A     Toner disposal box                   When the toner disposal box is full  the  Alert and toner disposal box lights blink     Instructions for replacing the toner disposal box come in the package with the  photoconductor cartridge and two toner disposal boxes   You use two toner  disposal boxes during the lifetime of one photoconductor cartridge  When you  replace a photoconductor cartridge  you also replace the toner disposal box   Periodically  however  you must replace a toner disposal box without also  replacing the photoconductor      Note  Dont throw away used toner disposal boxes  See the instructions that  come with the photoconductor cartridge for information on how to return  used toner disposal boxes to the manufacturer  By returning used toner  disposal boxes  you help reduce waste and preserve the environment     Photoconductor cartridge is wearing out    When the photoconductor cartridge is near the end of its life  the Alert  and photoconductor cartridge lights glow  When the photoconductor is  completely worn out  the printer stops working until you replace the  photoconductor cartridge  For information about ordering the replacement  supplie
51.  on the server and name it  for example  Network Install    Insert Printer Disk 1 for Macintosh     Drag the Printer Disk 1 icon onto the icon of the folder         cy  Network Install    ee       rnnnnnnng       eee OTC OCT Crrrietiirrerr erie    IMPORTANT You must drag the disk icon rather than copying the contents of  the disk directly     Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each Macintosh printer disk    Open the folder you created in step 1    The contents of each disk are contained in a folder named for that disk   Open the Printer Disk 1 folder     Click to select the Installer and Installer Script icons and drag the icons from the Printer  Disk 1 folder to the folder you created in step 1     The Installer and the Installer Script need to be in the same window as the  folders for the disks you copied     IMPORTANT Be sure to tell the users in your group where to find the software  and the name of the folder to look for on the server     Installing the printer software from the server    After you ve copied the software to the server as described in    Preparing a  Server so Users Can Install Over a Network    earlier in this chapter  users can  install the software on their own computers by following these steps     Turn off any automatic virus detection programs on your Macintosh before installing the  software     If you don t  problems may occur during the installation  After installation is  complete  you can turn the virus detection programs back on   For  instructions on t
52.  paper     You can load up to 250 sheets of 20 pound photocopier paper  Make sure the  edges are even on all sides before inserting the stack of paper     3 Slide the stack into the cassette     5 Do not stack paper  Slide paper under the retainers  higher than this point        26   Chapter 1    4    Slide the paper under the bracket at the front of the cassette     Load three hole punched  paper with the holes toward Load letterhead paper face up   the back of the cassette        Make sure paper fits under  these corner brackets     You can push the paper down   but don t overload the cassette     WARNING Never load a cassette with paper of the wrong size or type   Doing so may cause a paper jam  damage the printer drum  or use toner  unnecessarily     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    27    28    Chapter 1    5 Slide the cassette into the printer                                                           Push the cassette in  all the way  It should  be flush with the printer        Full Empty  Paper level indicator    Connecting the printer    You can connect the printer to a number of computers and a variety networks  using the printer   s LocalTalk  Ethernet  and parallel ports  The printer prints  only one user s job at a time  but it manages incoming print jobs from all  ports so that no printing conflicts or problems occur     it LocalTalk port                             lt   gt  Ethernet port   SCSI port  Parallel port   o Configuration  switch  E  SS  ae
53.  satisfactory results       Paper texture The printer may not print well on rough or highly textured  paper  Try a few sheets to test the quality       Paper finish The printer may not print well on some papers with a glossy  finish  Again  test a few sheets of any unusual paper stock you wish to use       Paper color The printer expects white paper and prints colors based on that  assumption  If you use colored paper  you should expect peculiar results     It is always best to use off the shelf paper products rather than unusual types    of paper     The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS produces high quality transparencies for  overhead projection  If you experience difficulties when attempting to print  transparencies with automatic feed  use manual feed instead     Automatic or manual printing with the printer    Chapter 9    You can automatically print using paper from the paper cassette or using  paper or transparencies stacked in the multipurpose tray  You can also  manually feed paper and transparencies into the printer using the  multipurpose tray     For information about selecting automatic or manual paper feeding  or  selecting the cassette or multipurpose tray to print from     If you have a Macintosh  see    Printing    in Chapter 6       If you have an IBM PC or compatible computer using Microsoft Windows   see    Printing from Windows Applications    in Chapter 7     Using the standard paper cassette    The standard paper cassette holds up to 250 sheets of paper  Yo
54.  serially     LaserWriter 16 600 PS    Set Defaults Update Info      Job Defaults    Paper Handling  Imaging Options    Job Handling Configuration    Default    Wait for all pages to be printed before closing connection  L  LocalTalk Port   L  Ether Talk      Het are      Paralle  Port       To send the job handling configuration settings to the printer  click Send     Setting the printer   s error timeout    Occasionally  a user may send a job to the printer  then experience a computer  problem  such as a power failure  Other users with print jobs in the queue  must wait until the printer cancels the problem job  Use the I O Error  Timeout panel to tell the printer how long to wait before going on to print the  next job in the queue     1 Open the Communication Configuration category   You see a list of communication settings options   2 Open the I O Error Timeout category     3 Inthe panel that appears  choose the time you want the printer to wait     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Set Defaults Update Info    Printer Information   Printer Preferences   Job Defaults   Communication Configuration    IFO Error Timeout    Time out after    Select a time for each ais Scents    1 Choose a time interval  ee from the pop up menu     interface you use with    r Parallel   the printer        4 To send the settings to the printer  click Send     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users    63    64    Setting the printer s network zones    You can specify the AppleTalk network zone that th
55.  software until you correct the  problem  If a dialog box says you don   t have the correct system software  you  can purchase a new version from an Apple authorized dealer     In the Installer dialog box  click the Install button     Installer Script    Easy Install         Macintosh printer software for Apple LaserWriter PostScript    Printers     Your Hard Disk When you re ready to    begin  click Install        The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and  then begins to copy files     Macintosh Users 157    158    Chapter 6    Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete     The Installer ejects disks and asks you to insert others  Keep following the  instructions on the screen until the installation is complete     When you see a message reporting that installation was successful  click Restart   The Installer restarts your Macintosh     The software is now installed on the hard disk  If you turned off any  automatic virus detection programs on your Macintosh  turn them  on again     Note  If installation is not successful  see Chapter 13 for suggestions     More information about the Installer program    In the procedure just described  the Installer places all the software you need  on your hard disk  In rare circumstances  you many want to install only a  subset of the software  In that case  choose Custom Install from the pop up  menu in the Installer  A list of choices appears  To install something from the  l
56.  the Chooser from the Apple menu   Select the printer that you want   Close the Chooser by choosing Close from the File menu     When you close the Chooser  it creates a desktop printer icon for the printer  you selected     On a Macintosh  printing functions are controlled through the Page Setup and  Print dialog boxes  which are accessed through the File menu     Most Macintosh application programs use a version of the standard Page  Setup and Print dialog boxes  although the exact options presented vary  among programs   See the manuals that came with your program for details  about specific options      The printer administrator can use the Apple Printer Utility to change default  settings the printer uses for all documents  For more information about the  Apple Printer Utility  see Chapter 2     Selecting page setup options    The Macintosh Page Setup dialog box allows you to specify certain aspects of  your document  such as its page size  format  and orientation  as well as the  settings for several print effects  You can change these settings for every  document you create  It   s recommended that you set your page setup options  when you first create a document  Then  as you view and format the  document it will closely resemble its final printed form     Choose Page Setup from the File menu     The Page Setup dialog box appears     2    For the dimensions  of the paper currently  selected  click here    To return to the  picture  click again         In the dialog bo
57.  the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   39    40    Adjusting communication settings    Chapter 1    Though you can adjust many of the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  communication settings  the standard  factory default  settings work for    most environments   Configuration  switch   poe          AW       WUE          DZ          ZN     A          Standard  factory default  settings for the parallel port    Port Mode Data Protocol    Parallel On AutoSelect TBCP    Standard  factory default  settings for the other ports    Port Interface Mode   LocalTalk LocalTalk On   Ethernet EtherTalk On  NetWare On  TCP IP On    If you have changed any of the settings and want to reset the printer to the  standard settings  move the configuration switch on the printer to the left   hand position  Then restart the printer  using the Restart Printer command  from the Apple Printer Utility or by turning the printer off and then on    Finally  return the switch to the right hand position     Why customize communication settings     Though the standard communication settings work well for most  environments  you might want to customize communication settings to turn  off network interfaces you don t need  For example  if you know the printer  will never receive a NetWare message over the network  you can turn off the  interface and stop the printer from sending out unnecessary NetWare packets     How to customize communication settings    Change the settings with either of the following two programs 
58.  the password   The characters are not  displayed as you type      Retype the password and press Enter     IMPORTANT Record the password for later use  If multiple file servers will be  served by the same printer  the same password must be used on each server     Press Esc once  then to save the change  press Enter   To return to the Available Options menu  press Esc three times     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   97    98    Chapter 3    Step 4  Setting up the PostScript printer driver for NetWare  In Windows  double click Control Panel    Double click Printers    Click Connect  The Connect dialog box opens    Click Network  The NetWare Printer Connections dialog box opens    Select the queue and the port the printer is assigned to    Click Capture  then click Close to close the dialog box    Select the port and queue combination you specified in step 5 and click OK     In the Printer control panel  select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS as the default printer  and click Close     Step 5  Making sure everything is working    After you ve used PCONSOLE to configure your printer as a dedicated print  server or a remote printer  you can print  from a Windows application  a  document such as the ReadMe file to verify that you can print to the Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS     Step 6  Setting up client computers for network printing    After the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is set up as a print server or remote  printer on a NetWare network  the client comput
59.  the photoconductor cartridge sits in an orange protective tray designed to  make installation easy and to protect the photoconductor from being touched  or exposed to light  Do not take the photoconductor cartridge out of the tray   If you scratch the photoconductor  the marks can appear on every page you  print  until you replace the photoconductor cartridge   Prolonged exposure to  light shortens the life of the photoconductor     Push the transfer drum lever down and to the right     This releases a locking mechanism                                                                                   Push the transfer drum lever to the right     2 Open the disposal box cover     Move the disposal box  cover to the left                                                                       The photoconductor cartridge goes here     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   13    14    Chapter 1    Holding the orange tray  line up the top of the photoconductor cartridge with the tracks  at the top of the opening in the printer          Line up the arrow on the  photoconductor cartridge  with the arrow above the  compartment opening     The top of the photoconductor  cartridge slides on these tracks                                                                             4    Slide the photoconductor cartridge all the way into the receptacle                                                                    When the photoconductor cartridge is  most of the way in  you can 
60.  the printer is set up  including the network  connection types and what options are attached to the printer     Both pages should look clean and sharp  If they are spotty  too light or too  dark  or otherwise unclear  switch the printer off and on to print the pages a  second time  Try this two or three times if necessary  If the output doesn   t  improve  or if the printer wont print the pages  refer to Chapter 12     Fixing  Image Problems        Check the status lights     After the startup and demonstration pages are printed  the Ready In Use light  glows steadily  All other lights should be off  If any other lights are on  see  Appendix G     Toner Low lights Maintenance lights                         Ready In Use light Paper Jam light  Alert light Paper Out light    Saving energy    Your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS meets Energy Star guidelines for saving  energy  By default  the printer enters an energy saving mode after it   s been  idle for 60 minutes  You can adjust the idle delay by using the Apple Printer  Utility on the Macintosh or the Apple Printer Utility for Windows     You can also save energy on the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  as well as on  all other printers  including those without energy saving features   by taking  these steps       Use the page preview feature provided in many programs to check page  layout rather than printing a draft       If you know you wont be using the printer for a while   say  a three day  weekend   turn it off     Setting Up
61.  to determine which font to print on your  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  or any PostScript printer     1  the printers ROM   2  the printer   s RAM   3  the printer   s hard disk   4      the System Folder where it looks first for a PostScript version of the font   then TrueType  and finally a bitmap version     Using Fonts With the Printer   283    284    Where fonts are stored    Appendix C    All fonts for your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer reside in special places  within the System Folder  To install fonts in System 7  you drag them to the  System Folder  Your Macintosh will automatically put them where they  belong     In system software versions 7 1 and 75  all the fonts are installed in the Fonts  folder within the System Folder     The Fonts folder can contain a total of 128 font suitcases  described in the  next section   plus any number of PostScript fonts  up to the available storage  capacity of your hard disk     HelveNarObl PostSoript    font ferr    PSE    Helvetica font suitcase    JE    HyperCharacters bmap font suitcase    London font suitcase    Los Angeles font suitcase    MerrionSquare brmap font suitcase    Merriaqu PostScript    font    Mobile font suitcase  Monaco font suitcase  MT Extra font suitcase  MTExt PostScript    font    Hew York font suitcase     amp   g         Palatina font suitcase    San Francisca font suitcase    of Bah Bl    Symbol font suitcase    Times font suitcase    TimesBol FostScript    font       FINE    IMPORTANT Fonts in
62.  transparencies 169  Changing the Print Quality mode 169  Printing while using the computer for other work 170  Monitoring and controlling background printing 17     Using the Apple Printer Utility 172    Contents   xi    xii    Contents    7 Windows and DOS Users 173    System requirements 173  Installing the Windows printer software 174  What todo next 177  Installing software for Windows NT 177  Printing from Windows applications 178  Setting printer driver options 178  Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Control Panel 179  Opening the printer setup dialog box from your application 179  Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Print Manager 179  Selecting printer options in the Setup dialog box 180  Additional printer options 181  PostScript 182  Fonts 184  Features 186  Job Control 187  Watermark 188  Downloading fonts 190  Downloading fonts manually to RAM or to the hard disk 191  Using a hard disk 193  Adding a hard disk to the device list 193  Initializing the hard disk 195  Printing to a PostScript file 196  Using the driver to print a PostScript file 197  DOS notes 199  Using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows 199    8    10    UNIX Users 201  Printing from a UNIX workstation to the printer 202    Loading Paper 203  Choosing paper 204  Automatic or manual printing with the printer 204  Using the standard paper cassette 205  Using the multipurpose tray 206  Opening the multipurpose tray 206  Placing paper and transparencies in the multipurpose tray  
63.  until you get  back to your printer     Shortcut  If you click the printer   s desktop icon to select it  you can choose  the commands that start and stop the print queue from the Printing menu  without opening the window for the printer         To move a print request from one printer to another printer of the same type  drag  the icon for the print request  spool file  to the icon of the printer where  you want to move it  If you re not sure whether the two printers are of the  same type  try moving the print request anyway   the printer software won t  let you move a print request to an incompatible printer     3 To continue working while documents print  click on a desktop window or your desktop     Using the Apple Printer Utility    The Apple Printer Utility program supplied with the printer software allows  the printer administrator to control various aspects of how the printer works   For information about using the Apple Printer Utility  see Chapter 2     172   Chapter 6    Windows and DOS Users    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS comes with software for IBM PC or  compatible computers using Windows 3 1  This chapter describes how to  install and use the PostScript Printer Driver and other printer software     Note for Windows NT users  See    Installing Software for Windows NT     later  in this chapter  for installation instructions  Refer to your Windows NT  manual for instructions about printing     System requirements    To use the printer  your computer system m
64.  used for  both AppleTalk and Novell networks  Use the following procedure to give the  printer a new AppleTalk name     IMPORTANT Be sure to tell users what the printers name is   Click the triangle for the Printer Preferences category to open it   The printer preferences list appears    Open the Name category    In the panel that appears  type the new name     To send the new name setting to the printer  click Send     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   101    102    Chapter 3    Identifying the printer   s physical location   You can type a description of the printer   s location    Click the triangle for the Printer Preferences category    You see a list of preferences    Open the Location category    In the panel that appears  type a description of the printer   s location     To send the setting to the printer  click Send     Printing font samples    You can print samples of the PostScript fonts currently stored in the printer   s  memory  both RAM and ROM  and on optional hard disks attached to the  printer         Choose Print Font Samples from the File menu     Turning the startup pages on or off    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS normally prints a startup page and a  demonstration page when you turn the printer on  The startup page shows the  printer   s name s   the total number of pages printed  the amount of memory   and communication settings  You can turn either or both pages off if you  wish     Click on the triangle for the Printer Prefere
65.  you can place letterhead paper in the  multipurpose tray and use it for printing the first page of a letter  and print all  following pages on plain paper from the standard paper cassette  or the  optional feeder  if you have one installed      Loading Paper   207    208    Chapter 9    For more information about selecting paper trays for printing  see Chapter 6 1f  you use a Macintosh or Chapter 7 if you use an IBM PC or compatible  computer     Tips for avoiding problems  Here are some suggestions to help you avoid problems with paper jams     m Make sure the paper lines up straight and doesn   t enter the printer skewed  at an angle     a Make sure the paper guides keep the paper evenly aligned  but don t set the  guides so tight that the paper stack bulges       Make sure the paper is as flat as possible  if the leading edge is curled   straighten it out before you put it in the multipurpose tray     Loading three hole punched paper in the multipurpose tray    You can load a stack of three hole punched paper in the multipurpose tray for  automatic printing  You can also print on three hole punched paper manually  by feeding one sheet at a time     This illustration shows how to load a stack of three hole punched paper in the  multipurpose tray               Place three hole punched paper  so the holes line up along this  edge of the tray                 Slide the width guides so they  rest against the paper           If the paper bows out even  Slightly  the guides are t
66.  you drag the font   s icon to the suitcase and drop it in   To remove a font  you drag its icon out of the suitcase     To create a font suitcase  duplicate an existing one and throw away its  contents  Then rename the suitcase as appropriate and drag whatever fonts  you want into it     You cannot have more than 128 font suitcases in the Fonts folder     Size limits for suitcases  No matter how many fonts you have in a single  suitcase  the Fonts folder counts the suitcase as a single unit  There s no limit  to the number of fonts in a single suitcase  but the suitcase cannot be larger  than 16 megabytes     IMPORTANT PostScript fonts cannot be placed in suitcases  they appear as  individual files  loose inside the Fonts folder  Other than the limit imposed by  your system   s memory  RAM   there   s no limit on the number of PostScript  fonts you can have     Styled fonts    Most fonts that come with your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer have  defined styles  For example  if you open the Bookman font suitcase  you see  files for bold and italic versions of the font     Bookman   4 items a4 ME in disk 16 6 MB available    Bookman Bookman  bold     cal    Bookman Citalic  Bookroan Cold  italic        But fonts such as Chicago  Geneva  Monaco  and New York do not come with  defined styles  If you open the Chicago font  contained in a suitcase in the  Fonts folder  which is inside your System Folder   you see only one file         Chicago  z      J i item 59 4 MB in disk 16
67.  you restart the  computer as usual  the icons will return to normal         You may have removed the desktop printing software that created the  printer icons  If you meant to do so  you can drag the icons to the Trash  If  not  you can reinstall the software as explained in Chapter 2     Apple Printer Utility can   t find an external hard disk    You ve attached an external hard disk to the printer  The Apple Printer Utility  cant recognize an external hard disk if   m the disk has not been initialized      you turned the disk on after turning on the printer  An    out of memory    message appears when you try to print     The printer may have insufficient memory to print if      the document contains too many fonts that need to be downloaded from  your computer to the printer      the document contains complex images      you use a lot of fonts in your document but have not selected Unlimited  Downloadable Fonts in the Page Setup Options dialog box    If a page contains very complex images  try to remove some of the complex  detail from that page  or spread the information over two pages  and try again  to print it     If you encounter the    out of memory    message frequently  you can remedy  this by increasing the amount of memory in the printer or installing a hard  disk  See Chapter 5     Options don   t appear in the Print dialog box     Make sure the hardware options are properly installed in the printer  as  described in Chapter 5     Open the Chooser and click the
68. 0   C  392   F  for 0 1 seconds     Paper sizes and capacity    Supports U S  letter and A4 in the standard paper cassette  The paper cassette  holds 250 sheets of 20 pound  75 g m     paper  The multipurpose tray can  hold up to 100 sheets of standard U S  letter paper  and other paper sizes up to  U S  legal  Optional 250 sheet universal cassettes are available that support  letter  A4  B5  and U S  legal paper sizes     Suggested paper brands    Apple has tested the following papers and found them to be acceptable   a Aussydat lay  A4  France  100 g m        Boise Cascade Laser  20 and 24 pound   a Classic Crest  24 pound   m Hammermill Laser Print  24 pound    m Legacy Laser Paper  24 pound   m Nekoosa Laser 1000  24 pound       Neusiedler  A4  Austria  100 g m    m Xerox 4024  LTR and A4   20  24  and 28 pound   m Nekoosa Laser 1000  24 pound    Recycled paper is not recommended  It tends to produce more paper dust   degrading image quality and causing more frequent replacement of the fuser     Transparencies    Use only Apple Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS Transparencies A4 or Letter     Dimensions     Height 18 in   46 cm   a Width 21 in   54 cm   a   Depth 23 in   58 cm     Technical Information and Printer Supplies    261    262    Appendix A       Space requirements                Weight  printer body only   a   Approximately 110 lb   50 kg     Environmental information    Operating  a Temperature 50   to 86   F  10   to 30   C   e Humidity 20 to 80 percent RH non cond
69. 128 KB parameter SRAM   SCSI interface for internal external hard disk s   LocalTalk interface   High speed parallel interface  IEEE P1284 ECP  bidirectional   Ethernet interface with three protocols   EtherTalk   Novell NetWare IPX  PSERVER or RPRINTER   TCP IP  BSD 1pd    External Ethernet transceivers available for   Thin Coaxial   Twisted Pair  10Base T    Thick Coaxial  IEEE 802 3 AUI   Two position communication configuration switch  All ports protocols simultaneously active  Color rendering acceleration   Data compression decompression system   Forgery tracking system   Adobe PostScript Level 2  version 2014     Theory of operation    Here is an abbreviated summary of how the printer operates     Controller sends a compressed page to the video ASIC  application specific  integrated circuit   which decompresses the page at once and sends it to the  laser circuitry in the engine     The laser  on a scan line by scan line basis  pulses color by color and  paints each successive layer of the image on the photoconductor drum  The  color order is magenta cyan yellow black  Laser light hits the  photoconductor on all the dots where toner should appear     a The toner carousel rotates to bring the appropriate color toner cartridge  into contact with the photoconductor   This contact is between the toner  developer rollers and the photoconductor   Toner jumps from the toner  charge to the photoconductor       At the same time  paper enters the system from the paper cassette and
70. 2 600 PS  Begin by selecting a location for the printer that  provides enough room to accommodate the increased height of the printer     If you intend to keep the printer in its current location  make sure that  adequate room will be available for opening the top cover  loading paper  and  maintaining the printer  You will also need to move the printer temporarily  from its current location to place the cassette base in its place  When moving  the printer  be sure to place it on a strong  stable surface that can support its  weight     Turn off and unplug the printer   Also  make sure the printer is disconnected from your computer or network     Unpack the 250 sheet feeder and remove any packing materials within the base and  paper cassette     3    Remove the universal paper cassette from the feeder        Squeeze the handle  lift  slightly  and pull the cassette out     You don   t need to fill the cassette with paper at this time   Place the feeder base where you want the printer to be located     Orient the base so that its paper cassette and the printer   s paper cassette will  be on the front side when the printer is on the feeder base     Remove the paper cassette from the printer     Installing Options    131    132    Chapter 5    6 With another person  lift the printer  position it directly over the feeder base  and gently  lower the printer until it sits evenly on the feeder                                                  Notice the three locator points  that pro
71. 2 600 PS 1   Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users 43   Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users 77  Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 111   Installing Options 129    Guide for Users   Macintosh Users 155  Windows and DOS Users 173  UNIX Users 201   Loading Paper 203     gt  Contents    10  11  12  13    Part Ill  A    rc O nn mM o5 O D    Maintenance 215  Clearing Paper Jams 227  Fixing Image Problems 237  Troubleshooting 243    Appendixes   Technical Information and Printer Supplies 257   Setting Up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer 269  Using Fonts With the Printer 277   Working With ColorSync 291   Packing and Moving the Printer 295   Replacing the Fuser 303   Diagnosing Problems for Service 323   Removing the Macintosh Desktop Printing Software 335  Index 339    Detailed Contents    Preface    Part      Communications regulation information xvii    Laser information XVI    How Much of This Book Do I Have to Read  xix  Printer administrators and users  Who does what xix  What the printer administrator should know xx   Getting new users started xx    Which chapters should I read  xxi    Guide for Printer Administrators    Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS 1   Main features of the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS 1   Anatomy of the printer 2   Choosing a place for the printer 3   Important safety instructions 4   Unpacking the printer 6   Installing the quick reference booklet 9   Installing the fuser oil bottle 10   Installing the photoconducto
72. 332    Appendix G    Fuser needs replacement    When the fuser is wearing out  the Alert and fuser lights glow  As the fuser  approaches the end of its life  the status panel shows a warning  prompting  you to order a replacement kit  After printing approximately 500 more pages   when the fuser is completely worn out  the printer stops working     For information about ordering replacement supplies  see Appendix A     Fuser                         When the fuser is wearing out  the  Alert and fuser lights glow     Instructions for replacing the fuser come in the package with the new fuser   together with a transfer drum cleaning unit  a separation discharger  an ozone  filter  and an air filter     Problem with internal random access memory  RAM     The printer does self diagnostic tests each time it is turned on  During this  testing  the printer verifies the amount of memory installed  If the test  determines that a SIMM is faulty  specific status panel lights come on     Cyan toner light on One light on means the SIMM in J11 is faulty   Two lights means the SIMM in J10 is faulty                       Paper Out and Paper Jam lights blinking    If you have just installed additional RAM  open the printer and make sure the  SIMMs are fully seated in the correct sockets that match one of the supported  configurations listed in Chapter 5  and in Appendix A   Try reinstalling the  SIMMs  following the instructions in Chapter 5     If this does not resolve the problem  contact an 
73. 42  261  letterhead 27  205  209  212  loading into the multipurpose  tray 207 211  loading into the standard paper  cassette 25 28  loading into the universal  cassette 211 213  photocopier 25  26  potential problems with 204  three hole punched 27  205  208  212  types and sizes supported 25   260 261  U S  letter size 25  205  211 213  261  paper cassette  See standard  paper cassette  Paper dialog box  Windows printer  Setup 180 181  paper handling options  turning on or off  Macintosh 61  Windows 103   104  Paper Jam light 39  228  324  327  flashing with Paper Out light  325  333   334  paper jams  avoiding 208  diagnosing 327  locating and clearing 228   236  paper level indicator on paper cassette 28  Paper Out light 39  324  326  flashing with Paper Jam light  325  333   334  paper pickup area  clearing paper jams in  229 232  paper pickup rollers  cleaning 226    paper pickup unit  pulling out of the  printer 312  316  paper size  specifying  Macintosh 163  Windows 180  paper source  selecting  Macintosh 164  Windows 180  paper type  configuring the printer for   Windows 186  parallel interface cable 35 36  78  parallel port 2  29  36  communication settings for 40  41  part numbers for standard and optional  parts 267  password 97  PCONSOLE NetWare utility  assigning a password for the print  server 97  basic key commands 86  creating a print queue 89   90  94   96  setting up the printer as a print  server 87   90  setting up the printer as a remote  printer 92   
74. 7  196  bitmapped fonts 278  281   282  blank areas on printed pages 238 239  blotches or spots on printed pages 238  blurry print quality 242  BOOTP  Bootstrap Protocol  method for  assigning an IP address to the  printer  UNIX 113  116  253  BSD UNIX systems  configuring  127 128    C    cable connector in paper pickup area  313 315  cables  attaching hard drive cable to the  controller board 142  connection problems  Macintosh 246  Ethernet 30 31  HDI 30 System 137  139  LocalTalk 32 33  34  parallel interface 35   36  SCSI peripheral 137  139  sheet feeder 133   134  cartridges  See toner cartridges  Chooser  Macintosh  configuring printer software for new  options 150 152  selecting the printer 47  159  troubleshooting 245 246  turning on background printing 170  CIE color standard 292  cleaning  See also maintenance  density sensor and separation  discharger wire 223 225  237   238  240  exterior of the printer 222  paper pickup rollers 226  238  client computers  setting up for network  printing 98  CMYK color 291  color conversion using ColorSync  292 293  color density  changing 254  color documents  printing  Macintosh 166  Windows 182  color for watermarks  Windows 190  color gradients are not smooth on printed  pages 241  Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement  Kit  purchasing 303  color matching information   Windows 182    color print quality problems 241 242  ColorSync 166  291 293  Communication Configuration category  settings  Apple Printer Utility for Windows 
75. 96  performance  adding hard disks and 137  adding RAM and 144  photoconductor cartridge  installing 12 18  life expectancy of 260  removing when moving the  printer 298  replacing 221  238 241  331  toner disposal boxes and 220  photoconductor light on status  panel 221  331  photocopier paper 25  26  ping command  UNIX 113   114 115  252  plugging in the printer 37  portrait orientation 180    ports  communication settings for 40  41  Ethernet 2  29  LocalTalk 2  29  32  34  parallel 2  29  36  SCSI 2  29  specifying a different port  Windows  80  175  PostScript Color Matching   Macintosh 166  PostScript dialog box  Windows printer  Setup 182 183  197  PostScript error handler  sending with a  Windows document 187  PostScript files  downloading to the printer  Macintosh 72  Windows 108  printing to  Windows 196 199  saving documents as  Macintosh 164  PostScript fonts  described 279  TrueType fonts and 283  Windows and 184  185  190 192  PostScript header  sending   Windows 187  PostScript Level 2 features  setting   Windows 182  197  PostScript performance settings   Windows 183  PostScript Printer Description  PPD  files  installing on a Windows NT system  81  177  LaserWriter printers supported  263 264  PostScript printer driver  changing default options  Windows  178 190  downloading fonts  Windows 190  installing for Windows 79  175  setting up for NetWare 98  power consumption specifications 263    Index   349    350    Index    power cord receptacle 2  37  power sw
76. Apple authorized service  provider     Diagnosing Problems for Service   333    Problem with the toner carousel    If you ve just installed a toner cartridge but haven t seated it properly in the  toner carousel  specific status panel lights come on     Two lights on in this area                   Black toner light on Paper Out and Paper Jam lights blinking    To fix the problem  open the printer   s door  Locate the toner cartridge you just  installed and press firmly to secure it     If this does not resolve the problem  contact an Apple authorized service  provider     334   Appendix G    Appendix H Removing the Macintosh Desktop  Printing Software    IMPORTANT If you are using QuickDraw GX on your computer  you cannot  remove the desktop printer software as described in this appendix     The printing software you installed on your Macintosh requires at least one  printer icon on your desktop and uses from 300 to 500K of your computer s  random access memory  RAM   If you use programs that take up large  amounts of memory  and available RAM is low  you can remove the desktop  printer software  When you remove the software  your computer uses the  original PrintMonitor supplied with your system software     To remove the desktop printer software  follow the instructions below   1 Quit any programs you are running   2 While holding down the Shift key  choose Restart from the Special menu     Hold the Shift key down until you see the    Extensions off    message on your  scre
77. Available Options menu  select Print Queues and press Enter     The Print Queues window appears  listing currently existing queues  if any  exist      Press Ins to create a new print queue   At the prompt  type the new queue name and press Enter     The new queue name now appears in the list of print queues     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   89    90    Chapter 3    If the new queue name is not already selected  use the arrow keys to highlight the queue  name and press Enter     The Print Queue Information menu appears  displaying options for managing  the print queue     Princ Jobs   status   Attached Print Servers  Information   Users   Operators    Print  Servers  In the Print Queue Information menu  select Print Servers and press Enter     The Print Servers window appears  Because you have not yet assigned a  server to the queue  the listing should be empty     Press Ins to view a list of available queue servers     The Print Server Candidates menu appears  listing candidates for queue  servers     Select the name of the print server you created earlier and press Enter     The selected server now appears in the Print Servers window  indicating that  the queue is now associated with that server     Press Esc until PCONSOLE quits   You will be asked to confirm your exit from PCONSOLE by pressing Enter     Turn the printer off and then back on     Completing the PSERVER configuration with the Apple Printer Utility    Start Windows  if it   s not alrea
78. Before  O After Document    Print   Color Grayscale w    Printer Profife   Prinfe c  s Hefauli       WIRTH dee SO Special Reporting  Summarize on Screen  Tray Switch     Print Detailed Report    Print Quality Mode   Printer   s default          Click OK     Click Print in the Print dialog box     Macintosh Users    167    168    Chapter 6       Turning tray switching on or off    Tray switching lets you switch automatically between the paper cassette and  the multipurpose tray  or other optional paper source  without reloading  paper when one paper source runs out of paper     IMPORTANT If you have the same size paper in your paper cassettes and  multipurpose tray and have tray switching turned on  the printer may draw  paper from any paper source that has the correct size paper  even if you  select a specific paper source from the Print dialog box   If you want to print  from a specific paper source only  turn automatic tray switching off     Choose Print from the File menu  or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and  drop it on the printer      In the Print dialog box  make the selections you want   Click Options     In the Print Options dialog box  choose On  Off  or Printer   s default from the Tray Switch  pop up menu     Print Options  Cover Page     None  O Before  O After Document    Print   Color Grayscale w    Printer Profiie   Primnfeis pofam       Tray Switch  _ Printer   s default        Print Quality Mode  _Printer   s default     To save your Tray    
79. CPU  SCSI ID  0 is used by an  internal hard drive  if one is installed     Setting the SCSI ID number    Each SCSI device attached to the printer must have a unique ID number     You assign a SCSI ID number by setting the SCSI ID switch on the back  panel of the disk  Follow these steps     Make sure the hard disk and printer are turned off     Set the SCSI ID according to the hard disk manufacturer   s specifications     IMPORTANT Before you turn on the printer  be sure to turn on any external  hard disks attached  If you turn on the printer first  it may not recognize some  attached external hard disks  When this happens  the printer may not start up  properly  and you wont be able to print anything  To fix this problem  make  sure all the hard disks are turned on  then restart the printer     Connecting a single external hard disk  Turn off the printer   Attach the HDI 30 SCSI System cable to the SCSI port on the printer     Attach the other end of the HDI 30 SCSI System cable to either SCSI port on the  hard disk     Attach a cable terminator to the other SCSI port on the hard disk     The printer recognizes disks formatted for use with the Macintosh  hierarchical file system  HFS  format  However  the printer will not recognize  disks using other formats  and the printer   s startup page will not indicate that  the hard disk is installed until after you initialize the disk  See    Initializing  Hard Disks     later in this chapter  for more information     Connecting mu
80. Follow these steps to make sure everything is working correctly     1 Make sure the printer is turned off                                                        If you can t tell whether the switch  is in or out  press and release it y A  once or twice until you   re sure the Off position On position  switch is out and the printer is off     2 Plug in the printer     Insert the socket end of the power cord into the receptacle on the back of the  printer  Plug the other end into a grounded  three hole  AC outlet        WN     WA             J  Cnu Power cord receptacle    Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   37    38    Chapter 1       Press the power switch to turn the printer on     The printer takes about 3 minutes to warm up  During warm up  various  status lights flash  and the printer performs an autocalibration procedure   ensuring good color printing quality                                                        On position    Save the startup page  It contains information you may need to complete network setup     The Ready In Use light should glow steadily  If it doesn   t  or if different lights  come on  see Appendix G for information about status lights     Every time you restart the printer  it automatically prints a startup page and a  demonstration page unless you turn either or both of the pages off using the  Apple Printer Utility  described in Chapter 2  or the Apple Printer Utility for  Windows  described in Chapter 3      The startup page shows how
81. Job Defaults    Communication Configuration    To restore the original software  settings  click Set Defaults        Additional options may appear that you can also open and work with  When  you are finished changing options in a particular category  you can click the  arrow again to collapse the options     After viewing the information and making changes  click the Send button to send your  changes to the printer     When you are finished making changes  click the close box to close the window     The next sections describe configuration procedures that you can perform  with the Apple Printer Utility  First select and open the printer in the Printer  Selector window  The information and procedures described in each section  then present how to work with the printer features window of the utility     Quitting the Apple Printer Utility  To quit the Apple Printer Utility         Choose Quit from the File menu     Viewing printer information    You can view information about your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS by  displaying the printer information in the printer features window       Open the Printer Information category     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Set Defaults Update Info        Printer Information    To change the printer s    AppleTalk Name     Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS       Product  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS AppleTalk name  see the  eee next section     Naming  PostScript Serial Humber   1a2b3c   i  Total number of pages printed  182 the Printer    You cannot change the
82. LaserWriter 12 600 PS is a PostScript printer only  If you are using  NetWare 4 x  use PostScript banner pages only  If you use another type of  banner page  the banner will not print     Do not use banner pages at all with NetWare 3 x  If you do  the banner will  not print     Installed Type 1 fonts and Adobe Type Manager    Among the files installed during an Express Installation  or a Fonts Custom  Install  are the Type 1 font outline   PFB  files and the Type 1 font metrics    PFM  files corresponding to the fonts resident in the printers ROM  Also  installed  in the Main program group  is Adobe Type Manager  ATM  and   within it  the fonts resident in the printer     You can use the ATM control panel to      install and remove additional Type 1 fonts      change the size of the ATM font cache   m turn ATM off and on    Installing Type 1 fonts   To add Type 1 fonts to your system   1 Double click the ATM icon  in the Main program group  to open the ATM control panel   2 Choose Add to display the Add ATM Fonts dialog box   3 Ifyou are installing fonts from a floppy disk  insert the disk containing the fonts     4 Inthe Directories list box  double click the drive or directory containing the fonts  The  font names appear in the Available Fonts list     5 Inthe Target Directory box for PostScript outline fonts  accept the default directory   c   windows psfonts  or type the name of the directory into which you want to  copy the font files  Any directory name you type will ap
83. LocalTalk network   see Chapter 2  For information about setting up the printer on a Novell  network running ATPS  see Appendix B     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   33    34    Chapter 1    Connecting directly to a single Macintosh   Use this method to connect a single Macintosh to the printer   Obtain two LocalTalk Kits    Plug one LocalTalk connector into the computer s printer  E  port    Plug one end of the cable into the LocalTalk connector on the computer   Plug the second LocalTalk connector into the printer   s LocalTalk  4f  port   Plug the other end of the cable into the LocalTalk connector on the printer     Printer LocalTalk    port                                           cy ee  a ee ma                                                                P   LI                                     IA    Nie    Note  You can use Ethernet transceivers  instead of LocalTalk connectors  to  connect a Macintosh directly to the printer     What to do after connecting to a single Macintosh     If you wish to connect the printer to other networks  or to connect the  printer directly to an IBM PC or compatible computer  see the appropriate  sections later in this chapter      m If youre finished connecting the printer  skip to    Adjusting Communication    Settings     later in this chapter     See Chapter 2 for more information about setting up the printer on a  LocalTalk network or Appendix B for information about setting up the  printer on a Novell network runn
84. Making sure everything is working    The best way to make sure everything is set up correctly is to print something   Before you can do that  you must set up your own workstation for printing  as  described in the steps that follow  The procedure described here is intended  to prepare for printing a sample page as quickly as possible  for more  complete instructions  see    Getting UNIX Users Started Using the Printer      later in this chapter     Preparing your own workstation for printing  Add the printer   s IP address and the printer s IP name to your  etc hosts file   if you haven   t already done so      Use the same IP address and IP name that you assigned to the printer in the  previous section     Add the printer to your  etc printcap file as a remote printer     You can add printcap options as you like   To see the available options   look at your UNIX system   s man page for printcap   Your entry should be  similar to the following     AppleLWTest    LaserWriter_12_600_PS        lp  mx 0 rm printer_IP_name        rp printer_queue_name        sd path_to_this_queues_spool_directory         1    path_to_this_queues_log_file  Replace printer_IP_name with the IP name you assigned to the printer   Replace path_to_this_queues_spool_directory with the pathname of the unique  directory created for this queue  Replace path_to_this_queues_log_file with    the unique pathname of the file where error information from the lpd  command will be logged     Setting Up the Printer f
85. Precautions during maintenance   To prevent damage to the printer while performing maintenance  observe the  following precautions    m Dont lubricate the printer        Dont attempt to disassemble the printer         Dont place anything on top of the printer                                                  Maintenance   217    218    Regular maintenance    Chapter 10    You can perform most regular maintenance tasks  replacing toner cartridges   fuser oil  the photoconductor cartridge  and toner disposal boxes  In addition   when the fuser wears out  you can replace it yourself  following the  instructions in Appendix F  or call an Apple authorized service provider to  do it for you      For information about ordering the replacement supplies  see Appendix A     Low toner    The toner cartridges hold the toner powder that forms the printed images   Each cartridge should yield about 4 000 pages  If you print many graphic  images  you may need to change cartridges more often  If your pages start to  look too light  or if you see thin vertical white lines in dark images  it may be  time to change the cartridge  Also  the status panel lets you know when toner  is low     A light indicates  which color is low              When toner is low  the Alert light glows  and a toner light comes on     When you see these lights  it can mean one of two things    m The toner powder needs to be redistributed inside the toner cartridge    a The cartridge needs to be replaced    If the lights 
86. Printer Utility program lets you change the default settings that  control how various aspects of the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS work  The  utility is placed in the Apple LaserWriter Software folder when the printer  software is installed  Use it to choose the basic printer settings that you want  to use for all documents     You can use the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes to change some other  printer settings without changing the printer   s basic defaults     IMPORTANT Changes you make with the Apple Printer Utility affect everyone  who uses the printer     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   49    50    Chapter 2    Use the Apple Printer Utility to    view information about the printer  such as the AppleTalk printer name and  the total number of pages the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS has printed    name the printer on AppleTalk networks   identify the printers physical location   download fonts to the printer or attached hard disks   remove fonts   print font samples   initialize internal or external hard disks connected to the printer  turn printing of the startup page on or off   turn printing of the demonstration page on or off   conserve power consumption by setting the energy saving delay  set paper handling options   set when the printer closes print jobs to provide faster throughput  set the printer   s error timeout   set the printer   s AppleTalk zone   view the printer   s Ethernet address   set the NetWare configuration   set the TCP IP configuration
87. Printers icon    The Printers dialog box appears    If it is not already selected  select the printer model from the Installed Printers list   Choose Connect    The Connect dialog box appears    In the Ports list box  select the port to which your PostScript printer is connected   Choose OK     The Connect dialog box closes  and you are returned to the Printers  dialog box     DOS notes    If you changed any printer settings to print to file  choose Setup to display the Setup  dialog box  Undo any changes you made and then choose OK     The Printers dialog box appears   Select OK to close the Printers dialog box     Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel     If you are using DOS programs  refer to the manual that came with your  program and follow the instructions for using a PostScript printer  Most DOS  programs are PostScript compatible     Capturing a print queue for DOS printing  From DOS  you can use the NetWare CAPTURE command to map the    parallel port to a print queue       Log in to the NetWare network and enter the CAPTURE Command  using the  following syntax     CAPTURE  q queue_name local lptnumber server server_name    jJob new    Unless you specify otherwise  the command assumes that you are mapping  the LPT 1 port to a queue     Using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows    The Apple Printer Utility program supplied with the printer software lets the  printer administrator control various aspects of how the printer works  For  informat
88. RP server on the same subnet as  the printer  you can use it to assign the IP address to the printer  Each time the  printer is turned on  it will automatically broadcast requests to BOOTP and  RARP servers  which will search a configuration file that maps the printer s  built in Ethernet address to the IP address that you assign     IMPORTANT When you use BOOTP or RARP to assign the printer   s IP  address  the address is stored permanently in the printer  The printer uses this  stored address only if the BOOTP or RARP server is not available at a  subsequent boot  Otherwise  each time you turn on the printer it gets its IP  address from the server  If you use the Apple Printer Utility  PostScript  or  ping to set the IP address manually  and later you want to assign the printer   s  IP address using a BOOTP or RARP server  you must first use the Apple  Printer Utility to reset the printer   s IP address to the factory default  0 0 0 0      If you have a Macintosh computer connected to the printer  you can use the  Apple Printer Utility to assign the printer   s IP address  as described in  Chapter 2     If you have a Windows computer connected to the printer  you can use the  Apple Printer Utility for Windows to assign the printer   s IP address  as  described in Chapter 3     Your network documentation explains how to add the printer   s information to  the BOOTP or RARP configuration file     For troubleshooting information about BOOTP or RARP  see Chapter 13     Step 4  
89. When you ve made the changes  you want  click Send  The changes are  sent immediately          To allow printing from all hosts on the same subnet as the printer  choose  Local and specify the printer   s subnet mask       To add a particular host to the list  choose Individual and type the host s IP  address       To allow printing from all hosts on a different subnet  choose Group  Then  type the IP address of a host on that subnet and move the slider to specify  the group   s subnet mask     4 To send the changes to the printer  click Send     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   69    70    Chapter 2    Viewing and changing communication settings    If you dont need all of the printers communication settings for your network  environment  you can turn unnecessary settings off with the Apple Printer  Utility     For more information about connecting the printer to LocalTalk  Ethernet   and parallel ports  see    Connecting the Printer    in Chapter 1     On the printer  make sure the configuration switch is in the right hand position     This is the normal setting and prepares the printer to accept the changes you  send  You should leave the switch in the right hand position unless you need  to reset the ports and cannot use the Apple Printer Utility to do it   For  example  if you inadvertently turn off communication to all ports      Configuration  switch   pet                  AM       AW                   E SUL    Men    Y    On your Macintosh  open the Apple P
90. White Gamma option in the Monitors control panel   To select a gamma option  open the Monitors control panel  then hold  down the Option key while you click the Options button  In the Options  window  click the Use Special Gamma checkbox to put a check in it  Then  choose Page White Gamma from the menu       Ona multiscan monitor  make sure that the color temperature  or intensity   is set to 9300 K  the default setting   See the monitor manual for  instructions  If the Page White Gamma option is selected with a color  temperature other than 9300K  your monitor colors could look too red or  too blue compared to printed colors     Some color devices allow you to set additional color options that affect the  way ColorSync converts colors  See the device manual for more information  about using ColorSync with the device     Working With ColorSync 293    Appendix E  Packing and Moving the Printer    If you need to move your printer a long distance  follow these steps   1 Turn off the printer and unplug it   2 Remove any paper from the paper cassette amd multipurpose tray   3 Remove the power cord and any cables connected to the printer   s ports   4 Open the printer   s door   5 Remove all four toner cartridges     6 Put each cartridge into its original wrapping  or put it into a resealable plastic bag and  seal the bag     295    7 Move the transfer drum lever to the right                                                                                         Push the transfer d
91. acintosh to configure NetWare  settings in the printer     Open the Communication Configuration category   You see a list of communication settings options   Open the NetWare Configuration category     What you see in the panel depends on whether you have set up the printer as  a remote printer  RPrinter  or a print server  PServer  in NetWare     When you set up the printer as a remote printer  the panel below appears     LaserWriter 12 600 P      Set Defaults Update Info    Ethernet Address    Het ware Configuration    Type the printer s name here     1  RPrinter Remote Printer Mame      a If you choose RPrinter  this area    ofthe panel is dimmed     Batty at       lf the printer is a print  server on the  NetWare network   click PServer     NetWare print  servers that have  access to the printer  appear here     To determine how  often the printer  checks print queues  for print jobs  use this  pop up menu     3    When you set up the printer as a print server  the panel below appears     E SSS  LaserWriter 12 600 PS 2E  Set Defaults liat e Mitu      gt  Ethernet Address    2 eee   Type the printer   s name here     Type the PServer printer  Aacess List  password here     a  It must match the password   Add         you assigned in the NetWare  i setup procedure    zH    E Queue Scan Time  10 Seconds      Password        To remove a print server from To add a print server to the access  the access list  click its name  list  click Add  In the dialog box that  then click Re
92. address inthe  etc hosts file     4  Check the network cabling to make sure the printer is physically connected  to the network     5  Make sure that the IP address is not a duplicate of one already in use on  the network     The BOOTP server is not responding    If you chose to use a BOOTP server to assign the printer   s IP address while  setting up the printer  but the server is not responding  follow these steps   1  Check the  etc bootptab file to verify    a thatthe lp entry is a valid IP address and that it matches the address in  the  etc hosts file    m the ha entry is the correct Ethernet address  found on the printer   s  startup page  with no colons separating the bytes    m the ht entry is either ether or ethernet    2  Turn the printer on and off and immediately verify that the bootpd is  running  On many UNIX systems  you can accomplish this by typing  ps  e or ps  ax at the UNIX prompt on the server  If the daemon is  not running  type bootpd  t15 or consult the UNIX man page on  bootpd     3  Turn the printer off and then back on    The RARP server is not responding    If you chose to use a RARP server to assign the printer   s IP address while  setting up the printer  but the server is not responding  follow these steps     1  Make sure that the server running RARP is on the same subnet as the  printer     2  Check the  etc ethers file to verify that it contains the correct  Ethernet address and hostname     3  Check the  etc hosts file to verify that it con
93. alk connecting kits 32  34  LocalTalk network  connecting to 29   32 33  LocalTalk port 2  29  32  34  communication settings for 40  41  location of the printer  choosing 3  189  identifying  Macintosh 54  Windows 102  locked disks 78  156  174  locking connectors  inserting 133  locking screws on fuser unit 306  309  low fuser oil light on status panel  2197329  low toner lights on status panel 218  328  lpr or lp command  UNIX 202    Macintosh computers  See also Apple  Printer Utility  Macintosh  background printing 170 172  changing default printer 161  changing settings 49 72  configuring printer software for new  options 150 152  connecting the printer to 34 35  determining printer status 160  getting users started using the printer  73 715  installing printer software for  44 48  74 75  156 158  page setup options 162 163  printing documents 164   167  printing transparencies 164  169  print quality modes 169  print queue functions 171   172  Read Me file 48  removing desktop printer software  335 337  selecting with the Chooser 47  159  switching between printers 161   162  system requirements 44  156  tray switching 168  troubleshooting 245 249  working with desktop printer icons  159 161  171  246  Macintosh hierarchical file system  HFS   format hard disks 137  139  143  magnetic fields  location of printer and 3    maintenance  See also Apple authorized  service provider dealer  safety  instructions  precautions 216 217  recommended service interval  215  260  re
94. all only a  subset of the software  In that case  choose Custom Install from the pop up  menu in the Installer  A list of choices appears  To install something from the  list  click to select it  then click the Install button   There is also a Custom  Remove feature      First  click this icon    If necessary  use the  scroll bar and arrows   to find the icon      Second  if the  network has zones   click one to select it     Step 2  Choosing the printer on the administrator s computer    Before you can use the printer  you must use the Chooser to select the printer  and set up the printer software  You only have to set up the printer software  once  when you first select it     Once you select the printer in the Chooser  you won t need to repeat this step  unless you change printers or change the way your printer is connected     Choose the Chooser from the Apple      menu   In the Chooser dialog box  click items to select them     Chooser    m Select a PostScript Printer   E   ES  Annette s Colors  AppleShare Color sw2400        Chris   s Choice j  pp   Color LaserWriter 12 600    Third  click the name of the  Dale   s Pro 630     printer you want to use     ae Diane   s Printer        Key Access aserWwriter 3 4 Firebottle  An Icon beside a printer       Frank   s Show name means the printer    es ret b s printer software has already been  Halftime At  Keith s Griffin Fax  Hardware Test Lab    il LaserWriter 16 600 a set up    Imaging E Marty s Personal Li  Instruments Lab 
95. ally downloading fonts can speed printing     Note  The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS has a set of built in fonts that do not  need to be downloaded  These fonts are listed in Appendix A     Whether it is better to let Windows download fonts automatically or to  manually download fonts yourself depends on the number and frequency  with which fonts are used in a document and the size of your printer   s  memory or hard disk     Downloading a Type 1 font to a PostScript printer usually takes from 15 to 20  seconds  When a program prints a document containing a font that is not  resident in your printer  Windows automatically downloads the font with the  document  However  after the document prints  any fonts that have been  downloaded with the document are cleared from the printer   s memory  This  means that each time you print a document that contains fonts not resident in  the printer  the fonts must be downloaded     By contrast  when you manually download a Type 1 font with the Font  Downloader  the font remains in printer memory  RAM  until you switch off  or restart the printer or when memory limitations are exceeded  Manually  downloading frequently used fonts therefore reduces printing time because  the fonts do not have to be sent to the printer each time they are used  Keep in  mind  however  that fonts manually downloaded to RAM reduce the overall  amount of memory available for printing and so may affect the printing of  documents that do not contain the downloaded f
96. ap  140  141  145  147  handling the photoconductor 12  installing additional RAM  145  147  148  installing an internal hard disk  140  141  laser information xviii  lifting the printer 130  132  moving the printer 295 301  preventing damage to the  printer drum 27  preventing paper jams 27  removing fuser oil from inside the  printer 300  removing the controller board  140  141  unpacking the printer 6  working in the fuser area 216 217  saving documents as PostScript or EPS  files  Macintosh 164  saving energy 39  See also  energy saving mode  scaling  specifying  Windows 181  screen fonts  See bitmapped fonts  SCSI ID number  setting 138  SCSI peripheral cable 137  139    SCSI port 2  29  139  SCSI terminators 137  138  139  144  SCSI voltage 138  security  limiting printer access to hosts  Macintosh 68   69  Windows 106  separation discharger unit  replacing  320 321  separation discharger wire  cleaning  40  223 225  238  240  server  See also networks  installing printer software from   Macintosh 74 75  servicing the printer   See Apple authorized service  provider dealer  maintenance   safety instructions  Setup dialog box  See printer Setup  dialog box  Windows  sheet feeder  clearing paper jams 229  236  configuring printer software for  Macintosh 150 152  Windows 150  152  186  installing 130 135  shipping screw 8  301  SIMMs  faulty indicators 149  333  inserting 145  148 149  upgrade specifications 265  Single Inline Memory Modules   See SIMMs  size  dimensions  
97. aper in the tray and let the printer feed the paper  automatically  or you can use the multipurpose tray for manual feed printing     With the Auto Select feature on in the Print dialog box  the printer draws  paper automatically from any source that holds the correct size paper  To tell  the printer the size of paper in the multipurpose tray  use the Apple Printer  Utility  The printer software can then determine correctly when to draw paper  automatically from the multipurpose tray  For more information about  defining the size of paper in the multipurpose tray  see Chapter 2 if you have  a Macintosh  or Chapter 3 if you have an IBM PC or compatible computer                      Do not stack paper     higher than this line   Slide the width guides   so they rest against the   paper  If the paper bows   out even slightly  the   guides are too tight                 Insert the paper  top first  face down   as far as it can go inside the printer        For manual feed printing  place a single sheet of paper or transparency film in  the multipurpose tray     The multipurpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of paper  When the printer  expects to find paper in the tray  for example  during a manual feed print job    the Paper Out light comes on to let you know that you should put paper in   the tray     By the way  You can have the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS print using a first  sheet from the multipurpose tray and remaining sheets from a paper cassette   or vice versa   For example 
98. are  see    Initial Novell NetWare Setup     later in this chapter     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   81    82    Chapter 3    8  9       Initial Apple Print Monitor for Windows setup    This section provides instructions on using Apple Print Monitor on an  Ethernet network or with a parallel connection     Double click the Apple Print Monitor icon located in the Apple LaserWriter Software  program group     In the Apple Print Monitor window  click Select Printer   In the Select Printer window that appears  make sure the Network button is selected     Or  if you connected the printer to your computer via the parallel port  click  the Parallel Port button     In the list of printers that appears in the bottom of the window  click the Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer you want to use     Click OK    Apple Print Monitor is now monitoring your print jobs to the printer   In the Apple Print Monitor window  click the Monitor Options button    The button appears on the right side of the window    In the Options window that appears  make the selections you want    E    Printing Documents    To be notified when one of your documents starts  to print and finishes printing  check this box     Ll Sound Notification For Hy Documents    Printer Errors arnings   C Display Status Window If you want a status window to open  automatically whenever there s a printing  problem  check this box     To be alerted by a beep when there s  a printing problem  check this box 
99. bs in the dialog box also give you access to additional  printer settings  For information about these settings  see    Additional  Printer Options     next   The previous sections explain how to open the  Setup dialog box     The Paper tab dialog box is displayed first     Apple Color LaserWriter 12 600 on LPT1       Paper   Features   Fonts   PostScript   Job Control   Watermark          Output Format  PostScript    Paper Source  Auto Tray Select    Paper Size   US Letter        Orientation    Portrait       Scaling     lt  Landscape  ico   percent  4 Rotated Landscape Copies  4      Special Effects                                    Output Format Selects either PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript  Use  PostScript for normal printing  Use Encapsulated PostScript to create a file  that can be placed in a document of a program that accepts Encapsulated  PostScript images       Paper Source Selects which paper cassette or multipurpose tray to use as the  paper source       Paper Size Specifies the paper size  Select the size that matches the paper in  the current paper source       Orientation Selects the orientation of the printed page  You can select  Portrait  tall   Landscape  wide   or Rotated Landscape  which prints text  and images in landscape orientation  but reverses the top and bottom of the  page  most useful when youre printing with three hole punched paper        Scaling Shrinks or enlarges the print image by a percentage you specify   You can scale the image f
100. cassette is securely in place     Check for a paper jam as described in Chapter 11   Check the network cables   Turn the printer off and back on  Check the startup page     Reinstall the printer software on your computer   s startup disk     A message on the screen says the printer can   t print     Try these steps     Make sure that the printer is turned on   Check the network cables     Make sure your startup disk has the LaserWriter 8 printer driver in the  Extensions folder  which is inside the System Folder     Make sure the printer is selected in the Chooser  Be sure to select the  printer   s name as well as the LaserWriter 8 icon and  if your network has  zones  the correct AppleTalk network zone     Make sure that the printer has paper correctly installed     Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect     The printer automatically goes into an energy saving mode after it   s been idle  for a while  When you print while it   s in this mode  the printer takes about  three minutes to warm up before it can print the first page     The printer administrator can adjust this feature by using the Apple Printer  Utility on a Macintosh computer  see Chapter 2  or the Apple Printer Utility  for Windows on a Windows computer  see Chapter 3      IBM PC or compatible troubleshooting    If you are using the printer from an IBM PC or compatible computer  use this  section for troubleshooting tips     A message on the screen says the printer can   t print     Try th
101. come on in the middle of a printing job  and the output is still    satisfactory  continue printing if you wish  You won t harm the printer by  doing so     Check the status panel to see which toner color is running low  Then take  that cartridge out  rock it gently back and forth a few times  as described in  the cartridge installation procedure  to redistribute the toner  and reinsert the  cartridge  If the light goes out  you can continue to use the same cartridge  It   s  probably a good idea  however  to order or purchase a replacement cartridge  after this kind of early warning     If the light stays on  change the cartridge  Instructions for replacing a  cartridge come in the package with the new cartridge     IMPORTANT Use only an Apple Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge with the  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS     Note  Don t throw away used toner cartridges  See the instructions that come  with your new cartridge for information on how to return the used cartridge to  the manufacturer  By returning used cartridges  you help reduce waste and  preserve the environment     Low fuser oil    When the bottle containing fuser oil is nearly empty  the Alert and fuser oil  lights glow   When the fuser oil compartment is empty  the printer stops  working until you replace the oil                  When fuser oil is low  the Alert Fuser oil  and fuser oil lights glow     For information about ordering the replacement supplies  see Appendix A     Instructions for replacing the fuser
102. connected to  the printer  Macintosh 58  143  Windows 195  reinitializing when previously  used 137  space requirements  IBM PC or compatible 77  173  Macintosh 44  156  hardware requirements  IBM PC or compatible 77  173  Macintosh 44  156  NetWare 77  HDI 30 SCSI System cable 137  139  hierarchical file system  HFS  format  58  143  195  horizontal bands appear on the printed  page 241  host access to printer  TCP IP  configuration  Macintosh 68   69  Windows 106  HP UX version 8 07  configuring  121 123  HP UX version 9 xx  configuring  123 125  humidity requirements for the printer  3  262    IBM AIX version 3 x  configuring  125 126  IBM PC or compatible computers   See also Apple Printer Utility  for Windows  Windows  configuring printer software for new  options 150  152  configuring the printer 99 110  connecting the printer to 35   36  initial Novell NetWare setup 83   98  installing printer software for  78 81  174 176  setting printer options 178   190  system requirements 77  173  troubleshooting 249 251  icons  Macintosh desktop printer  159 161  171  246  indicator lights  See status panel lights  initializing a hard disk connected to  the printer  Macintosh 58  143  Windows 143  Installer program  Macintosh 45   46  74   75  157 158  installing  additional RAM 145 149  ATM Type 1 fonts  Windows 109  external hard disks 137 139  fuser oil bottle 10 11  an internal hard disk 140 143  the optional 250 sheet feeder  130 135  the optional 250 sheet universal  casset
103. created on Apple LaserWriter printers   Final pages were output directly to separated film on a PostScript  driven imagesetter     Text type is Times    display type is Helvetica   Narrow  and cover type is Apple Garamond   Apple   s corporate font  Ornaments are custom symbols designed for Apple Computer     PostScript  the LaserWriter page description language  was developed by Adobe Systems  Incorporated     
104. ct your printer from dampness or wet weather  such as rain  snow  and  SO on     Do not allow children access to the fuser oil bottle  toner cartridges  or  used toner disposal boxes     Read all the installation instructions carefully before you plug your printer  into a wall socket     Keep these instructions handy for reference by you and others     Follow all instructions and warnings dealing with your system     WARNING Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused  Operation  of this product  or similar products  must always be supervised by an  adult  Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical  product and do not permit them to handle any cables     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    5    6    Unpacking the printer    Chapter 1    IMPORTANT The printer weighs approximately 110 pounds  approximately 50  kilograms   Don t lift it by yourself     Undo the clips on the outside of the printer box   Lift the box  uncovering the printer   If possible  get another person to help you     With another person  remove the plastic bag  then lift the printer and place it in the  location you   ve chosen     IMPORTANT This side of the  printer is heavier than the other side                 IMPORTANT Do not plug in the printer or turn it on until you ve completed  setup  including all the network connections  as explained later in this  chapter  Be sure to remove all the packing materials from inside the printer     Remove the packing tape from the ou
105. cts on the page are blurry     The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS uses a compression scheme to provide 600  dpi  nearly continuous tone color printing using as little as 12 MB of RAM   Because of the compression  some details and fine lines in colored objects  can appear blurred  Try these steps     m Add more RAM  If youre printing legal sized pages on a Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS with 12 MB of RAM  the printer uses a different  compression scheme  If you increase RAM to 16 MB or more  the print  quality of legal size pages improves    a Use thicker lines or fewer colors  Solid colors such as black  cyan  magenta   yellow  red  blue  or green look best      m Use a different program  Image manipulation programs may cause text and  fine lines to look blurry when printed  Use a word processing  desktop  publishing  or illustration program        Drop outs    appear on legal size paper     If youre printing legal sized pages on a Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS with 12  MB of RAM  the printer uses a different compression scheme  Small areas of  a legal size document may not print because information has been lost during  decompression  If you increase RAM to 16 MB or more  the print quality of  legal size pages improves     Troubleshooting    This chapter provides solutions to problems you may have printing with the  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS from Macintosh  Windows  DOS  and UNIX  computers     Note  For easier troubleshooting  it   s a good idea to turn off background  printing 
106. d UNIX  computers on the network     Installing the Apple Printer Utility for Windows    The Apple Printer Utility is automatically installed when you do an Express  installation  as described earlier in this chapter     Opening and quitting the Apple Printer Utility  1 Start Windows  if it   s not already running   2 Goto the Program Manager window   3 Open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group   4 Double click the Apple Printer Utility icon     The utility displays the Printer Selector window  listing the printers whose  features you can set     5 Select New   6 Select the connection type and the printer you want to work with     7 When you re finished using the utility  choose Exit from the File menu     100   Chapter 3    Selecting the printer    Before you can use the Apple Printer Utility to perform operations on a  printer  you must       Select the connection type       Select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer you want  then click Open Printer     Viewing printer information    You can view information about your printer       Inthe Apple Printer Utility program  click the triangle for the Printer Information  category to open it  displaying a list of printer information     IMPORTANT    Triangles point down when a category is open  displaying the  options in the category  Click the triangle  and not the category name  to open  or close a category     Giving the printer an AppleTalk name    Each Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS can be given an individual name 
107. d control the documents that are waiting to print  To learn how  to turn background printing on and off  see the previous section     Printing  While Using the Computer for Other Work        To monitor or control a print request  follow these steps   Double click the desktop printer icon you re interested in     A window opens listing the documents that are printing or waiting to print     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Hegheies    Documents in Queue  3 Column titles  click to sort     Document Mame Pages Copies Print Time    Urgent Documents currently printing    System 7 5   Read Me L    Normal Documents waiting to print  E mail to Jacob  print        Watching the status messages can be helpful when troubleshooting printing  problems  When more than one job is waiting to be printed  a list of print  jobs appears in the waiting list  When you sort the list by Print Time  it shows  the order in which they will be printed     Choose what you d like to do       To delete a print request  select its title or icon  by clicking it   then click the  Remove button   You can select more than one item at a time by holding  down the Shift key while clicking   You can also drag the icon for the print  request to the Trash  Note that these methods delete only the print job  also  known as the spool file   not the document itself       To puta print request on hold  click its title or icon to select it  then click the  Hold button  The print request stays on hold until you select its title agai
108. d the date and time of  printing     Choose Print from the File menu    The Print dialog box appears    In the Print dialog box  make the selections you want   Click Options     In the Print Options dialog box  make the selections you want     For a cover page that appears at the front or at the end  of the document  click Before or After Document     Print Options    Cover Page     None _  After Document    Print   Color Grayscale w    Printer Proiiei Primers fefaui          PostScript    Errors  No Special Reporting       Tray Switch   Printers default w  Print Quality Mode   Printer   s default          Click OK   In the Print dialog box  click Print     The cover page will print each time you print your document     Macintosh Users   165    166    Chapter 6    Printing color and grayscale documents    When you print a document containing colors or shades of gray  you can  choose to maximize either image quality or speed     Choose Print from the File menu  or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and  drop it on the printer      In the Print dialog box  make the selections you want   Click Options     In the Print Options dialog box  choose what you want from the Print pop up menu     Print Options    Cover    Black and White Boefece      o  After Document  ALULLA  Color Grayscale   Colorsync Color Matching f    PostScript Color Matching    PostScript    Errors   No Special Reporting       Tray Switch   Printers default w  Print Quality Mode   Printer   s default 
109. ding downloaded fonts   A printer can get the fonts from its hard disk more quickly than it can  download them from the computer   s hard disk     Your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer can receive downloaded fonts     Appendix D  Working With ColorSync    The Macintosh does a lot of work to make sure that the colors you see on  your monitor closely match the colors you get on your printers  scanners  and  other devices  The software that does this work is called ColorSync  Because  ColorSync does its work behind the scenes  you don   t have to know anything  about it  But if you re curious  this appendix explains how ColorSync works  and how you can benefit from using it     The problem that ColorSync solves    Providing consistent color with desktop computers is a technical challenge   Reproducing colors consistently from device to device is difficult because  colored light on your monitor is very different from printed ink  Different  color devices use different methods for representing color information and  produce different ranges of colors     Monitors  and most scanners  produce colors by mixing red  green  and blue  light   called RGB color  Most printers produce colors by mixing cyan  a  shade of blue   magenta  a bright pink   yellow  and black ink   called CMYK  color  Since monitors and printers have different color capabilities  they  cannot reproduce each other   s colors exactly     In addition  no two monitors or printers produce exactly the same colors   Y
110. dy running     In the Program Manager window  open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group  and double click the Apple Printer Utility icon     Click Network    Select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer you want  then click Open Printer   Select Communication Configuration    Select NetWare Configuration     Enter the PSERVER name  the same printer name you used in PCONSOLE  if you are not  using the default name      Click the Rescan button     Rescan sends the new settings to the printer and causes it to renew its  communications with the NetWare file server     The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is now ready to function as a print server  on the NetWare network     What to do next  The next section covers setting up the printer as a remote  printer  If you want to assign a password on the server  skip to    Step 3   Assigning a Password for the Print Server  Optional   Otherwise  skip to     Step 4  Setting Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare        Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users    91    92    Chapter 3    Step 2  option B  Setting up the printer as a remote printer   RPRINTER mode     To configure your printer as a remote printer  you must use PCONSOLE to  specify the print server that will provide service to your printer  create a print  queue  if necessary   and associate a print queue with the print server  You  must also use the Apple Printer Utility to set up the printer as a remote  printer     IMPORTANT The procedures in this 
111. e  Fonts menu 288  organizing in suitcases 285   286  PostScript  184 185  190 192  279  283  preventing downloading   Windows 187  questions and answers 288   290  QuickDraw GX font format 281  removing  Macintosh 57  resident in ROM 259 260  styled 287  substitution in printed documents  289  290  TrueType 110  184 185  280 283  types to buy 288  for watermarks 189  where they are stored  Macintosh  284 286  font samples  printing  Macintosh 57  Windows 102  Fonts dialog box  Windows printer Setup  184 185  Fonts folder  Macintosh 284    Index 343    344    Index    font substitution 289  290  font suitcases 285   286  fuser  clearing paper jams from  229  234 235  life expectancy of 260  removing 307  replacing 222  303 311  332  fuser access door  opening closing 235  305  311  reattaching 310  removing 305 306  unpacking 7  fuser door strap 305  310  fuser light on status panel 222  303  332  fuser oil  cleaning spills 304  life expectancy of 260  removing from inside the printer 300  replacing 219  fuser oil bottle  installing 10 11  removing 299  304  replacing 311  fuser oil compartment 2  10 11  fuser oil light on status panel 219  329    G    grayscale documents  printing   Macintosh 166   grounding the printer 4   grounding wrist strap 140  141  145  147    H    hard disks  adding to the Windows device list  193 194  connecting 137 144  downloading fonts to  Macintosh 56 57  Windows 191 192  font handling and network  performance with 137  initializing a hard disk 
112. e  printing them     1 Add the printer   s IP name and IP address to each users  etc hosts file     Use the same IP address and IP name that you assigned to the printer in     Step 3  Assigning an IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter     Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users   119    2 Makean entry to each users  etc printcap file     You can add printcap options as you like   To see the available options   look at your systems man page for printcap   Each entry should be similar  in form to the following     local_print_queue_name    description_of_printer         lp  mx 0 xrm printer_IP_name        rp rocal_print_queue_name        sd path_to_this_queues_spool_directory        1    path_to_this_queues_log_file    Fill in the parameters in italics as follows     m Replace local_print_queue_name with the queue name the user should use  to reference the printer  Typically  queue names indicate the location of the  printer and what sort of files it should be used for     a Replace description_of_printer with a comment describing the printer     a Replace printer_IP_name with the IP name you assigned to the printer in     Step 3  Assigning an IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter       Replace rlocal_print_queue_name with the queue name the user should use  to reference the local printer     a Replace path_to_this_queues_spool_directory with the pathname of the  unique directory created for this queue     m Replace path_to_this_queues_log_file wit
113. e SIMM in place     Hold the SIMM over the slot  aligning the connectors and notches with the  controller board   s connector  Notice that one edge of the SIMM has a  distinctive notch that you can use to judge the orientation and alignment of  the SIMM with the connector  This notch  on the bottom edge of the SIMM   should be down as you install the SIMM     WARNING To avoid damaging or scratching the printed circuits when  installing a SIMM  don t touch the controller board with hands or tools           If you are installing two  SIMMs  install one in slot  J10 first   This makes access  to the J11 slot easier         Insert the SIMM at  an angle  retaining clips snap into place     Depending on the amount of memory youre installing  you may need to  install one or two SIMMs  and perhaps remove a SIMM from a slot in order  to insert one that has more memory  For example  when installing two 16 MB  SIMMs  you must remove the 4 MB SIMM from the J11 slot     To remove a SIMM  carefully spread the retaining clips at the base of the  installed SIMM  then rotate the SIMM until it can be pulled free of the slot     Repeat step 7 to install the second SIMM if necessary     Remove the grounding wrist strap     10 Slide the controller board back into the printer     11 Replace the two screws that hold the controller board in place                       12 Turn on the printer     The printer does self diagnostic tests each time it is turned on  During this  testing  the printer verifi
114. e a TrueType or bitmapped font on your screen   double click the font   s icon to open it  A sample of that font appears  in three  sizes for TrueType fonts and in the size you opened for bitmapped fonts      Palatino  gt     Palatino 12      How razorback jumping frogs can  level six piqued pymnasts     e 12 point      How razorback jumping frogs can level    six piqued gymnasts         18 point   How  razorback jumpine  frogs can level six piqued  gymnasts     To use this font  drag it onto your System Folder    To use this font  drag it onto your System Folder       You can also use the Key Caps desk accessory to examine fonts  See the  documentation that came with your computer for instructions     QuickDraw GX imaging technology    A QuickDraw GX font is a TrueType or PostScript font with an additional set  of sophisticated features  These features include extremely accurate  typographic elements such as ligatures and kerning  plus the ability to skew   rotate  and add perspective to text in extremely flexible ways     QuickDraw GX is more than a font format  it   s a sophisticated printing and  display technology that supports complex graphics and advanced typography     How TrueType fonts work with other kinds of fonts    Although TrueType fonts offer distinct advantages  your Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS printer can also use other kinds of fonts     TrueType and bitmapped fonts    Macintosh computers running System 7 come with both bitmapped  screen   fonts and TrueTy
115. e additional printing options for use with your Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS  including a 250 sheet feeder  which contains a  universal cassette   You can also buy the universal cassette as a separate  optional item and use it instead of the standard paper cassette that came with  the printer   For instructions on attaching options  see Chapter 5     The way you control the printer from your computer depends on the type of  computer and program you are using  For general information about printing  with a Macintosh  see Chapter 6  For information about printing with an IBM  PC or compatible computer using Microsoft Windows  see Chapter 7  For  specific information about printing with a particular program  refer to the  documentation that came with the program     WARNING The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is not designed to handle    printing on envelopes or labels  Those materials could cause damage to  the printer     203    204    Choosing paper    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS produces the best results on paper labeled        laser quality     16  to 24 pound stock   The printer can accept stock of up to  28 pounds from the multipurpose tray     To avoid paper problems  keep the following potential trouble sources   in mind      Temperature Some letterheads are printed with low temperature dyes that  vaporize and smear at the temperatures inside the printer  Some glossy   coated letterheads may lose their coating in the printer  Using high quality  stationery should ensure
116. e following steps   m Make sure that the printer is turned on       Check the network or parallel cables     a   Make sure that the PostScript Printer Driver has been installed as  described in Chapter 7         You must send PostScript to the printer  PCL won t work  and nothing  prints     Nothing is printed  no paper comes out of the printer     Try the following steps   a Make sure the printer is turned on   a If youre using Novell NetWare 3 x  make sure banner pages are disabled         Send only PostScript files to the printer  do not send straight text or PCL  files     m Check the    List of Printers    box to see that your printer is selected  See  Chapter 7 for details about installing and selecting the printer driver     a Try printing the document again  but choose Download PostScript Error  Handling in the Printer Setup PostScript Options dialog box     Troubleshooting   249    250    Chapter 13    a Check the Paper Out light  If it is on  add paper and replace the paper  cassette       Check for a paper jam as described in Chapter 11   m Check the printer cables     a Check the position of the port configuration switch as described in     Adjusting Communication Settings    in Chapter 1         Turn the printer off and back on  Check the startup page     m Check the Protocol options on the PostScript tab dialog box  Choose  Serial Parallel for a parallel connection  None for Ethernet  If you are  using a parallel connection  make sure Send Data in Binary is not 
117. e names of your local print queues  see your printer administrator   or look in your  etc printcap file     The document generates PostScript errors     The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is a PostScript only printer  Before you can  print ASCII files  you must filter them into PostScript     The banner page prints only the system and remote printer names     The lpa printing protocol does not provide the user name or filename in a  way that can be included in the banner page     Troubleshooting   251    252    Chapter 13    Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect     The printer automatically goes into an energy saving mode after it   s been idle  for a while  When you print while it   s in this mode  the printer takes about  three minutes to warm up before it can print the first page     The printer administrator can adjust this feature by using the Apple Printer  Utility on a Macintosh computer  see Chapter 2  or the Apple Printer Utility  for Windows on a Windows computer  see Chapter 3      icant ping the printer by IP name or IP address     Follow these steps     1  Try to ping yourself or another host  If this ping fails  your IP software  is not running  or your network is down     2  Turn the printer off and then back on  This sometimes fixes the problem  itself  and it also causes the startup page to print  Use the startup page to  verify the printer   s IP address     3  Verify that the IP address on the configuration page is identical to the IP  
118. e of the following measures       Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops        Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio        Move the computer farther away from the television or radio        Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio      That is  make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by  different circuit breakers or fuses      If necessary  consult an Apple authorized service provider or Apple  See the service and support  information that came with your Apple product  Or  consult an experienced radio television  technician for additional suggestions  You may find the following booklet helpful  Interference  Handbook  stock number 004 000 00493 1   This booklet  prepared by the Federal  Communications Commission  is available from the U S  Government Printing Office   Washington  DC 20402     IMPORTANT Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer  Inc    could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product     This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple  peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components  It is  important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between  system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios  televi
119. e printer will be  accessible in     1 Open the Communication Configuration category   You see a list of communication settings options   2 Open the Printer   s Zone category     3 Inthe panel that appears  select the zone you want the printer to appear in     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Set Defaults Update Info    Printer Information   Printer Preferences   Job Defaults   Communication Configuration  170 Error Timeout    Printers cone    Select an AppleTalk zone on which the printer should appear     Select the zone satin  you want  Hardware Test Lab    Imaging  Instructional Products       4 To send the zone setting to the printer  click Send     Chapter 2    The printer s  Ethernet address  appears        Viewing the Ethernet address   You can view the printer   s Ethernet address when needed   Open the Communication Configuration category    You see a list of communication settings options     Open the Ethernet Address category     LaserWriter 12 600 F     Set Defaults Update Info    Printer Information   Printer Preferences   Job Defaults   Communication Configuration  170 Error Timeout  Printer   s Zone    Ethernet Address    Printer s Ethernet Address   08 00 07  46 A8 00     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users    65    66    If the printer is a  remote printer on the  NetWare network   click RPrinter     Chapter 2    Working with a NetWare network    If the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is connected to a NetWare network  you  can use the Apple Printer Utility on a M
120. ect NetWare Configuration    Select RPRINTER    Enter the name of the print server NLM in the Connect Print Server Name field   Click Send     The printer is ready to function as a remote printer on the NetWare network     What to do next  If you want to assign a password on the server  go to    Step 3   Assigning a Password for the Print Server  Optional      Otherwise  skip to     Step 4  Setting Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare        Step 3  Assigning a password for the print server  optional     You can use PCONSOLE to assign a password for printing privileges   However  if you assign a password in PCONSOLE  you must also use the  Apple Printer Utility for Windows to specify the same password  as described  in    Setting Additional Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for  Windows     later in this chapter   The password specified in PCONSOLE tells  the file server what to expect  the password specified with the Apple Printer  Utility tells the printer what to send      Select Print Servers from the Available Options menu in PCONSOLE and press Enter   The list of print servers appears     Select the name of the print server for which you want to assign a password and press  Enter     The Print Server Information menu appears     Printers   Information and Status  Users   Operators   Serviced Netware Servers  Description   Password   Audit    Select Password and press Enter   At the prompt  type the password and press Enter     PCONSOLE asks you to retype
121. ed  gently tap the stack of  transparencies on a flat surface   Fan the edges of the stack  before you insert it     To avoid leaving fingerprints  and ensure the best image quality   handle  transparencies by their edges     IMPORTANT Insert transparencies so the white strip goes into the printer first     Some transparencies have short strips that don   t extend fully across the page   Align these transparencies with the short strip on the left hand side of the  stack  Inserting transparencies incorrectly causes them to jam           Slide the width guides  so they rest against the  transparencies  If the  transparencies bow out  even slightly  the  guides are too tight                   Load transparencies so the white strip  goes into the printer first           If a transparency has a partial strip  align    the strip on the left as it goes into the printer     lf a transparency has a full width paper strip   Use only transparencies recommended make sure the paper side is up as it goes  for use in the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  into the printer     Loading Paper    211    212    Loading the optional 250 sheet universal cassette  1 Slide the cassette out of the printer   It may be in the optional sheet feeder      2 Set the width guide to match your paper   s width     The cassette is marked with positions for paper of U S  letter  A4  B5  and  legal sizes        Chapter 9    4 Insert your paper within the guides     Load three hole punched  paper with the holes toward 
122. egory    You see a list of preferences    Open the Paper Handling category    In the panel that appears  click the checkbox to turn Automatic Tray Switching on or off     An X in the checkbox means the printer looks for paper in the multipurpose  tray when other paper sources are empty     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   103    104    Chapter 3    Use the list box to choose a default paper size for the multipurpose tray     If you turn on the automatic tray switching feature  the printer draws paper  from any paper source that holds the correct size paper  However  the printer  cant tell what size paper is in the multipurpose tray  so you must tell it  If the  paper size for the multipurpose tray is the same as the paper in the standard  paper cassette  and automatic tray switching is turned on   the printer  automatically uses the multipurpose tray as a paper source     To send the paper handling settings to the printer  click Send     Setting up job handling    You can set job handling for individual network protocols that you use  If you  need to stop the printer in the middle of printing a document  you can use this  feature to make sure the printer finishes the job before closing the connection     Open the Job Defaults category   You see a list of preferences   Open the Job Handling Configuration category     In the panel that appears  click the checkboxes next to network types to specify when  the connection with the computer should be broken    
123. eiver to the  printer   s transceiver  as shown here                                                           To connect the printer between two devices on an Ethernet network   disconnect one Ethernet cable from the transceiver of the device  immediately to the left or right of the printer and plug it into the new  printer   s transceiver  Then use the new Ethernet cable to connect the free  socket on the printer   s transceiver to the socket you freed on the other  device s transceiver                                                                       To connect the printer to an Ethernet hub  see the documentation that came  with the Ethernet hub     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   31    32    Chapter 1    What to do after connecting to an Ethernet network     If you wish to connect the printer to other networks  or to connect the  printer directly to a single Macintosh or to an IBM PC or compatible  see  the appropriate sections later in this chapter       If youre finished connecting the printer  skip to    Adjusting Communication  Settings     later in this chapter     For more information about setting up the printer for different network  interfaces  see Chapters 2  3  and 4    Connecting to a Local Talk network   If you have an existing LocalTalk network  here   s how to add the printer to it     Obtain a LocalTalk connecting kit     LocalTalk cable       LocalTalk connecting kits come in many varieties  Yours may look different   The kit illustrated
124. en or until your normal desktop appears     When the Macintosh desktop appears  an X appears through your desktop  printer icons     3 Drag the desktop printer icons into the Trash   4 Open the System Folder and find the PrintMonitor Documents folder     5 Open the PrintMonitor Documents folder and drag to the Trash any files you find     335    336    Appendix H    Close the PrintMonitor Documents folder   Open the Extensions folder in the System Folder     Drag the three files   Desktop Printer Extension  Desktop PrintMonitor  and Desktop  Printer Spooler   from the Extensions folder into another folder on your hard disk     Choose Restart from the Special menu to restart your computer     When you print documents now  your Macintosh uses the PrintMonitor  software  For more information about using PrintMonitor  see the next  section     In the future  if you want to use the desktop printer software again  you can  restart your computer with the extensions off  see step 2 of these  instructions   drag the three desktop printer files  listed in step 8  into your  Extensions folder  and restart the computer     You can also use the installation disks that came with your printer to reinstall  the desktop printer software     Monitoring and controlling print requests without desktop printers    If you don t have desktop printers  you must use the PrintMonitor program to  monitor and control control background printing     1 While your document is printing  choose PrintMonitor f
125. ensing  for optimum print    quality  operate at 35 to 70 percent RH     Storage  toner cartridge and printer     Temperature    4   to 104   F   20   to 40   C   m Humidity 10 to 95 percent RH non condensing    Acoustic noise    Standby  less than 45 dB  m Printing  less than 55 dB    Wait times  a Either 120 or 240 V  3 5 minutes maximum    a Either 100 or 220 V  4 5 minutes maximum    Voltage requirements  a 100 to 120 V  50 60 Hz     220 to 240 V  50 Hz      m Voltage tolerance   10     Power consumption    Energy saving mode    Approximately 42 W  meets EPA Energy Star     Standby average    100 120 V  approximately 215 W  220 240 V  approximately 238 W    Operating average    100 120 V  approximately 535 W  220 240 V  approximately 524 W    Maximum power consumption    100 120 V  approximately 1 1 KW  220 240 V  approximately 1 0 KW    About PostScript Printer Description  PPD  files    Installing the Macintosh printer software also installs PPD files to support the  following Apple LaserWriter printers     Laser Writer   LaserWriter Plus   Personal LaserWriter NT  Personal LaserWriter NTR  Personal LaserWriter 320  LaserWriter II NT  LaserWriter II NTX    Technical Information and Printer Supplies    263    264    Appendix A    LaserWriter II NTXJ  LaserWriter If  LaserWriter Ig  LaserWriter Select 360  LaserWriter Select 360f  LaserWriter Select 610  LaserWriter Pro 400  LaserWriter Pro 405  LaserWriter Pro 600  LaserWriter Pro 630  LaserWriter Pro 810  LaserWriter Pr
126. ents on a  NetWare network  see Appendix B     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users    85    86    Chapter 3    Using PCONSOLE    PCONSOLE is a DOS based utility for configuring printers on a NetWare  network  This chapter provides information on the set of basic PCONSOLE  operations required to set up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  PCONSOLE is  not provided with the printer  It comes with your NetWare software  Detailed  information about PCONSOLE can be found in your NetWare  documentation     The descriptions of PCONSOLE in this guide assume the use of keyboard  commands to navigate through the program and perform operations  With the  installation of a DOS mouse driver  you can also use a mouse to make  selections and choose options  The table below lists some basic PCONSOLE  key commands     Command key Description   Esc  Escape  Returns to the previous level   Del  Delete  Deletes a selected item   F7 Cancels changes   Alt F10 Exits the program   Ins  Insert  Inserts a new item for a list   F1 Displays online help   Arrow keys Cycle through menu selections or entry fields    Step 2  option A  Setting up the printer as a print server   using PCONSOLE     To set up your printer as a print server you must run PCONSOLE under DOS  to specify the print server  PSERVER mode  and create a print queue     IMPORTANT The procedures in this section are specific for a version of  PCONSOLE running under NetWare 4 02  If you are running PCONSOLE  under NetWare 4 1 or
127. enu     If the Chooser isn   t listed in the Apple menu  the System file on your startup  disk may be outdated  or you may have removed the Chooser from the Apple  Menu Items folder in the System Folder on your startup disk  You can obtain  the current system software from an Apple authorized dealer     Make sure that you have only one System Folder on your startup disk   Can t find the printer driver icon in the Chooser     Make sure that the LaserWriter 8 printer driver is properly installed  The  printer driver may be on your startup disk but may have been moved to the  wrong location  If necessary  drag the driver into the Extensions folder inside  the System Folder     Also make sure that you have only one System Folder on your startup disk   Refer to the information that came with your Macintosh     The printer is not listed in the Chooser     If you ve selected the LaserWriter 8 icon but your Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS is not named in the list of printers  one of the following may be  the cause     m The printer has been turned off  Make sure it is plugged in and turned on   and wait for the startup page to print      m The communication settings are not set correctly  See    Adjusting  Communication Settings    in Chapter 1 and    Viewing and Changing  Communication Settings    in Chapter 2  See    Cant Communicate With the  Printer     earlier in this chapter     Troubleshooting   245    246    Chapter 13        Someone may have renamed the printer   Check the star
128. er  250 sheet universal cassette  See  universal cassette  Type 1 fonts 109 110  184  190 191  Type 3 fonts 184  Type 42 fonts 184    U    Ultrix version 4 2  configuring 127 128  U S  letter size paper 25  205   211 213  261  universal cassette  clearing paper jams 229  232  installing 136  loading 211 213  removing 131  types and sizes of paper  supported 25  261  UNIX  assigning an IP address to the printer  113 116  117  119  getting users started using the printer  119 120  HP UX version 8 07  configuring  121 123  HP UX version 9 xx  configuring  123 125  IBM AIX version 3 x  configuring  125 126  initial TCP IP setup 112 118  lpr or lp command 202  printing from 202    setting up the printer as a remote  printer 117 118   Sun OS version 4 1  Ultrix version  4 2  other BSD systems   configuring 127 128   troubleshooting 251 253   unpacking   the optional 250 sheet feeder 130   the optional 250 sheet universal  cassette 136   the printer 6   8    V    ventilation requirements for the printer 3   vertical lines on printed pages 238   virus detection programs  installing  printer software and  Macintosh  45  46  75  156  158   voltage requirements 263    W  X  Y    wait timeout setting  Windows 183  wait time specifications 262  Watermark dialog box  Windows printer  Setup 188   190  watermarks  selecting and editing   Windows 181  188 190  weight of printer 3  6  262  white gaps between colors on printed  pages 241  width guides  adjusting  on multipurpose tray 207  208  
129. er 12 600 PS recognizes disks formatted for use with the  Macintosh HFS format  However  the printer will not recognize disks using  other formats  If you attach such a disk to the printer  you will need to  reinitialize the disk before you can use it and then reload any fonts from your  computer  Reinitializing erases everything  including all fonts previously  stored on the disk     Connecting external hard disks    You must use an HDI 30 SCSI System cable to connect the first external hard  disk to the external SCSI port  For each additional hard disk you connect to  the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  you will need a SCSI peripheral cable   which links two SCSI devices  You ll also need a SCSI terminator connected  to the last device in the SCSI chain     Installing Options   137    138    Chapter 5    IMPORTANT The external hard disk you connect to the Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS printer must supply 5 volts DC to the SCSI bus to work properly   Check the documentation that came with the hard disk for information about  SCSI voltage     The kind of SCSI cable terminator to use with disks connected to the printer  can be black or gray  To purchase terminators  contact an Apple authorized  dealer     Before you connect your external hard disks  make sure that each one has a  unique SCSI ID number  Do not turn on or attempt to use the printer or any  attached hard disk until each disk has been assigned its own number  Do not  use SCSI ID  7  it is reserved for the printer   s 
130. er 8 UNIX Users   Chapter 9 Loading Paper   Chapter 10 Maintenance   Chapter 11 Clearing Paper Jams  Chapter 12 Fixing Image Problems  Chapter 13 Troubleshooting    Part Il contains information you need to use a  printer that has already been set up  You can find  setup instructions in Part l        part          Macintosh Users    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS comes with software and fonts for use with  Macintosh computers  This chapter describes the system requirements and  the procedures for installing the printer software and fonts on a Macintosh   You Il also find explanations for using the standard printing and page setup  options of the LaserWriter 8 printer driver software supplied with your  printer     155    156    System requirements    To use the printer software  you need a Macintosh with a 68020 or higher  central processing unit  any Macintosh except a Macintosh Plus  SE  Classic   Portable  or PowerBook 100   Your Macintosh must have system software  version 7 1 or later and at least 4 megabytes  MB  of memory  If your system  software is an earlier version  you need to obtain a system software upgrade  from your computer or software dealer     Installing all the printer software and fonts for the Macintosh requires  approximately 7 5 MB of free space on your hard disk     Installing the printer software    Chapter 6    To install the printer software on a Macintosh computer  follow these steps     IMPORTANT Do not    drag install    the printer software  I
131. er Queues    Add a Remote Queue  A form appears for you to define a remote printer     Enter information into the remote printer form  as follows       Name of queue to add Type the local queue name users will use as the name  for the printer       Designation host for remote jobs Type the printer IP name assigned to the  printer as described in    Step 3  Assigning an IP Address to the Printer      earlier in this chapter       Name of queue on remote printer Type the local queue name users will use as  the name for the printer      Name of device to add Type any name  up to 7 characters  The name is  required but has no effect on the print service    To start the 1pd subsystem  choose the following items from the SMIT menu    Spooler  Print Jobs and Printers    Manage Remote Printer Subsystem   Server Services   lpd Remote Printer Subsystem   Start Using the lpd Subsystem    Start BOTH Now and at System Restart    At the UNIX prompt  start the qdaemon by typing    startsrce  s qdaemon    Try printing by using this command     lpr  Pprinter_queue_name filename    Note that there   s no space between  P and printer_queue_name     Configuring Sun OS version 4 1  Ultrix version 4 2  or other  BSD systems    Loginas root     Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer  as described in    Step 3  Assigning an  IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter     Make sure the printer   s IP name and address are entered inthe  etc hosts file     If you re using Network In
132. er icon  functions 161  watermarks  Windows 188   190  printing and transfer area  paper jams  and 229  printing errors  reporting  Macintosh 167  printing materials  See paper   transparencies  print job interrupts  preventing  Macintosh 62  Windows 104  print jobs  Windows protocol options to  begin and end 183  PrintMonitor 335 337  Print Options dialog box  Macintosh  165 169  print quality  resolution specifications 259  troubleshooting 237   242  print quality modes  Macintosh 169  Windows 186  print queue  capturing for DOS printing 199  creating using NetWare 89 90  94   96  monitoring and controlling on a  Macintosh 171   172  sending UNIX documents to 201  print requests  monitoring and controlling  171 172  337  print server  assigning a password for 97  NetWare network setting  Macintosh 67  Windows 105  setting up the printer as in NetWare  87   90  protocol options to begin and end  Windows print jobs 183  PSERVER operating mode  NetWare  84  87 91  95  105    Index 351    352    Index    Q    queue  See print queue   QuickDraw GX  removing desktop  printer software and 335   QuickDraw GX font format 281   quick reference booklet  storing 2  9    R    radio or television reception  interference  with xvii  RAM  See also memory requirements  configuring printer software after  adding  Macintosh 150  Windows 150  152  186  downloading fonts to  Windows  191 192  downloading removing fonts   Macintosh 56   57  faulty SIMM indicator on status  panel 149  333  instal
133. er needs to be redistributed inside the toner cartridge  For  instructions  see Chapter 10       The cartridge needs to be replaced  Instructions for replacing a toner    cartridge come in the package with the new cartridge     If the light comes on in the middle of a printing job  and the output is still  satisfactory  continue printing if you wish  You won t harm the printer by  doing so     328   Appendix G    Low fuser oil    When the bottle containing fuser oil is nearly empty  the Alert light glows   When the fuser oil compartment is empty  the printer stops working until you  replace the oil  For information about ordering replacement supplies  see  Appendix A     Instructions for replacing the fuser oil come in the package with the new  bottle of fuser oil                    When fuser oil is low  the Alert Fuser oil  and fuser oil lights glow     Diagnosing Problems for Service    329    330    Appendix G    Toner disposal box is full    When the toner disposal box is full  the Alert and toner disposal lights blink   For information about ordering replacement supplies  see Appendix A     Toner disposal box                When the toner disposal box is full  the  Alert and toner disposal box lights blink     Instructions for replacing the toner disposal box come in the package with the  photoconductor cartridge and two toner disposal boxes  Or you can follow the  intructions in Chapter 1 for installing a toner disposal box     Note  Don t throw away used toner disposa
134. er that does not support binary  communication  disable the    Send Data in Binary    option  Selecting the     Optimize for Portability    option creates PostScript files that print  successfully from different programs on a wide variety of printers and  imaging devices  it is recommended that you enable this option     Choose Close to close the Printers dialog box   Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel     Your computer is now set up to create PostScript files when you choose the  Print command from a Windows program     Windows and DOS Users   197    198    Chapter 7    Step 2  Printing to a PostScript file    Start the program and open the document for which you want to create a PostScript file     If necessary  select the Print Setup command from the File menu  change the settings as  appropriate  and select OK     Select the Print command from the File menu    Your program   s Print dialog box appears    Choose OK    A dialog box appears that asks you to name the file   Enter a pathname and filename for the file     If you don t specify a pathname  the PostScript file is placed in your programs  default directory     Choose OK   The PostScript file is created  and you are returned to your program     Step 3  Restoring your printer setup options    After creating PostScript files  you need to restore your original printer setup  options before you can use your printer again     From the Program Manager  open the Control Panel    Double click the 
135. erate properly     Substitute fonts can also appear in a document composed on one Macintosh  that has a particular set of fonts but printed on another Macintosh that doesn t  have those fonts     Why does a document written entirely in Times look different on different Macintosh  computers     Times  an extremely popular font  is manufactured and sold by more than one  company  Such fonts usually have small differences  even though they have the  same name  For example  the Times font manufactured by Adobe Systems  Incorporated has different letterspacing than does the Times font from Apple  Computer     Using Fonts With the Printer   289    290    Appendix C    What is font substitution     Font Substitution is an option in the Page Setup dialog box for certain  PostScript printers  When font substitution is turned on  these printers will  use their built in equivalents for three bitmapped fonts  Times for New York   Helvetica for Geneva  and Courier for Monaco      What   s a downloadable font     A downloadable font is a TrueType or PostScript font sent to an    intelligent     printer by your system software   An intelligent printer is one that has a  microprocessor built into it   The printer then uses the font to print your  document     If a printer has sufficient memory  it can hold more than one downloaded  font  otherwise  it must request the fonts it needs as necessary  This can be a  time consuming process     Some printers have hard disks attached to them for hol
136. ers must be set up for  printing  You can find detailed installation instructions in Chapter 7  You can  set up all the client computers yourself or give the users the instructions from  Chapter 7  If you ask the users to set up their own computers  be sure you give  them all the information they need  such as the printer   s queue names and  what options are installed     What to do next    You can set additional printer features as explained in the section    Setting  Additional Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for Windows     next     Setting additional parameters with the Apple Printer Utility for Windows    The printer has default settings for both parallel and Ethernet physical  configurations  If you want to view the printer   s configuration information or  change any of the settings  you must use the Apple Printer Utility     The printer itself has no control panel  but you can set features on it remotely  by using programs on computers that can communicate with the printer     a On Macintosh computers  use the Apple Printer Utility and the Chooser   s  setup function  which are described in Chapter 2     a On IBM PC and compatible computers  use the Apple Printer Utility for    Windows  described in this chapter     The Apple Printer Utility program lets you change the default settings that  control how various aspects of the printer work  The utility is placed in the  Apple LaserWriter Software program group when the printer software is  installed  Use it 
137. es out of the printer  fuser and output trays     Face down output tray    Fuser                                                         Printing and Face up output tray  transfer area   Standard   paper   cassette   Optional Paper pickup  BOSh access door   feeder  with r     universal       Paper pickup access  Paper door on optional  cassette  250 sheet feeder    IMPORTANT If you experience paper jams after you first set up the printer   check all areas of the printer to make sure that the cardboard and orange  plastic packing materials have been removed     Clearing Paper Jams   229    Clearing paper from the paper pickup area    Make sure the multipurpose tray is closed before you open the door to the  paper pickup area     The paper jam is in  the paper pickup area                                                        230   Chapter 11    If you can   t see or reach the jammed paper  pull the mechanism out for easier  access  After you remove the paper  slide the mechanism back into the printer                                               IMPORTANT After you remove the paper  wipe off the rollers with a clean  dry   lint free cloth   This keeps paper dust from accumulating      Clearing Paper Jams   231    232    Chapter 11    If you still can   t find the problem in any of the places identified on the status  panel  the paper jam may be inside the paper cassette   Sometimes a sheet of  paper gets tangled while still in the cassette   Slide the paper cassette out of  t
138. es the amount of memory installed  If the test  determines that a SIMM is faulty  specific status panel lights come on     Try reinstalling the SIMMs  following the instructions earlier in this chapter   If this does not resolve the problem  contact an Apple authorized dealer   For  more information about diagnostic tests and status lights  see Appendix G      Cyan toner light on One light on means the SIMM in J11 is faulty   Two lights means the SIMM in J10 is faulty                       Paper Out and Paper Jam lights blinking    Installing Options   149    150    13    Check the startup page to see that the new memory is listed there     If the startup page has been turned off  use the Apple Printer Utility to print  the startup page   For details  see    Turning the Startup Pages On or Off    in  Chapter 2 for Macintosh computers  or Chapter 3 for Windows computers      Next  configure the printer software to use the additional memory     For configuration instructions  see    Configuring Your Software for New  Printer Options     next     Configuring your software for new printer options    Chapter 5    After installing more memory or a 250 sheet feeder  the administrator or the  user needs to update the printer software on each computer connected to the  network  You can reconfigure the printer software using the Chooser on  Macintosh computers or the Windows Setup dialog box on IBM PC or  compatible computers     Configuring the Macintosh printer software  Choose the C
139. esn   t work   If the test document doesn   t print  follow these steps    Check whether the rip daemon is running  At the UNIX prompt  type  ps  e   grep rlp    If the process is running  you will see one or more lines of text  if it is not  running  you will see no response     If rlp is running   that is  you saw one or more lines of text in step 1    kill the process  by typing    kill  15 process_number_from_step_l    Make sure the following entry is inthe  etc inetd conf file     printer stream tcp nowait root     usr lib rlpdaemon rlpdaemon  i    This line tells inetd to start the rlp daemon automatically when a print  request is made  if it   s not already running      Make sure the following entry is inthe  etc services file     printer 515 tcp spooler    Start inetd by typing the following command at the UNIX prompt      etc inetd  c    Repeat the steps in    Configuring HP UX Version 9 xx        Configuring IBM AIX version 3 x    Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer  as described in    Step 3  Assigning an  IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter     Make sure the printer   s IP name and address are entered inthe  etc hosts file     At the UNIX prompt  type the following to run the SMIT utility     smit    Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users   125    126    Chapter 4    To add a remote queue  choose the following items from the SMIT menu   Spooler  Print Jobs and Printers    Manage Remote Printer Subsystem   Client Services   Remote Print
140. essible only through ATPS queues     Example     Sales Printer Ethernet Zone     h    Note  Other ATPS options are available for configuring the printer  See the  NetWare for Macintosh documentation for more information on these options     Press Esc to quit editing    A prompt appears  asking 1f you want to save your changes   Type y and press Enter    The list of configuration files reappears    Press Esc until the Install utility exits    At the system console prompt  type unload atps and press Enter     This command unloads the previous version of ATPS configuration  Now you  you can reload ATPS using the modified configuration     At the system console prompt  type load atps and press Enter     The new configuration is immediately available     Setting up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer   275    Kinds of fonts    Appendix C  Using Fonts With the Printer    A font is a collection of letters  numbers  and symbols in a distinctive  typographic design  Your Macintosh computer and Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  printer come with a variety of fonts that look great both on your monitor and  on paper     Fonts come in such a variety of formats that problems can sometimes arise   This appendix provides the information you need to avoid such problems and  to solve them if they come up     The Macintosh works with three main kinds of fonts  bitmapped  PostScript   and TrueType fonts     Apple provides two kinds of fonts with your Macintosh and the   Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS 
141. f you do  the files  wont be properly decompressed and won t work     Turn off any automatic virus detection programs you have on your Macintosh computer     If you don   t  problems may occur during the installation  After installation is  complete  you can turn the virus detection programs back on   For  instructions on turning off each virus detection program  see the manual that  came with the program  or telephone the manufacturer of the program      Press and hold down the Shift key  then choose Restart from the Special menu     When a message on the screen tells you that the extensions are off  you can  release the Shift key  Your extensions have been turned off  When you restart  the Macintosh after a successful installation  the extensions will turn on  again     Make sure the printer software disks are locked   Insert Printer Disk 1 for Macintosh into a disk drive     If necessary  open the disk icon     Make sure the disk  named here is the  one on which you  want to install the   printer software     To start the Installer program  double click its icon     Installer    In the Welcome dialog box that appears  click Continue     After a moment  the Install dialog box appears  At the top of the dialog box is  a pop up menu set to allow you to perform an Easy install     IMPORTANT The Installer checks to make sure you have what you need to use  the printer software  If youre missing anything  a message tells you what you  need  You wont be able to install the printer
142. fely     Remove the two screws that hold the controller board in place            a  mI          WARNING Avoid touching the surface of the printers controller board  with hands or tools to avoid damaging or scratching the printed circuits     Grasp the metal frame of the controller board and slide it out of the printer     Place the board next to the printer   When you put on the grounding wrist  strap  you want to be able to reach the controller board easily      IMPORTANT Put on a grounding wrist strap before handling the SIMM or any  internal printer parts  The strap grounds you to the printer  preventing any  static discharge that might harm the board or printer  Wearing the strap  cannot harm you  If you havent got a grounding wrist strap  you can purchase  one from a computer dealer     Wrap the end of the grounding strap that does not have copper foil on it around your  wrist     The strap   s light adhesive coating keeps it attached to your wrist  while  allowing for easy removal     Remove the backing from the piece of copper foil at the other end of the strap     Attach the copper foil end of the strap to the metal surface on the inside of the printer by  pressing the adhesive backing against the metal     Copper foil end    Metal surface    mN  Ym                   Installing Options   147    148    Chapter 5    Insert the SIMM into the connector at an angle and press the SIMM into the retaining  clips on each end of the connector until the clips snap and fasten th
143. ferred from the  Cassette pop up menu     Current Printer Description File  PPD  Selected      LaserWriter Color 12 600 PS       Installable Options     Memory Configurati Installed  eT Cie Mot installed     Installed and Preferred       Click OK   In the Printer Setup dialog box that appears  click OK     Now the printer recognizes that the optional feeder has been installed  If you  chose Installed and Preferred  the printer knows that the optional feeder is  the preferred paper source for Auto Select  a choice in the Print dialog box      Configuring the printer from an IBM PC or compatible  You must have Windows running on your computer to use this procedure     From the Program Manager  double click the Control Panels  then double click the  Printers Control Panel icon to display the Printer Setup dialog box     Select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS from the list of Printers     Choose the Setup command from the Options menu to display the Setup dialog box for  your printer     The Setup dialog box contains buttons that display other dialog boxes  containing additional printer settings     In the Setup dialog box  click the Features button   The Features dialog box appears     In the Features dialog box  use the controls to set up the optional features that you have  installed on your printer     Click OK to close the Features dialog box     Click Close to close the Setup dialog box     Guide for Users    Chapter 6 Macintosh Users  Chapter 7 Windows and DOS Users  Chapt
144. fonts so they don   t need to be downloaded  each time you use them  thus expediting your printing  Chapter 5 explains  how to install a hard disk     After the hard disk is installed  you must add it to the device list and initialize  it  as explained in the next two sections     Adding a hard disk to the device list  1 From the Program Manager  open the Control Panel   2 Double click the Printers icon    The Printers dialog box appears     3 fitis not already selected  select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS from the Installed  Printers list     4 Click Setup     The Setup dialog box appears     Note  You can also open the Setup dialog box from within many Windows  programs  Check your program documentation to see if you can change your  printer setup from within your program     5 Click Fonts   6 Click Font Downloader    The Font Downloader dialog box appears   7 Click Device Installer     A dialog box opens     Windows and DOS Users   193    194    Chapter 7    Click Add New   Another dialog box opens   Make sure    Magnetic disk    is selected  then click Add     Complete the dialog box as follows     a Fill in the Available Memory box with the number of kilobytes your hard  disk can store     a If you have Font Metrics files for the fonts  you can check the Read Font  Metrics Files checkbox     a Make sure the Volatile checkbox is not checked     as Make sure the Writable checkbox is checked    Click Add    A dialog box opens    Type a name for the hard disk    Click a b
145. for the Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS appears on the desktop   If you dont close the Chooser  the desktop  printer won t be created   If you want  you can repeat steps 1 through 3   selecting and setting up other printers on your desktop for easy access     The last desktop printer you create   becomes the default printer     Its icon has a bold outline    Color LaserWriter    A desktop printer icon cannot be moved off the desktop  unless you throw it  away   however  you can move it anywhere on the desktop that you like     Macintosh Users   159    160    Creating  throwing away  and manipulating desktop printer icons    To create a desktop printer  select the printer using the Chooser  After you  close the Chooser  the icon will appear on your desktop  See    Selecting and  Setting Up the Printer     earlier in this chapter     You may also do the following with desktop printer icons       Throw away the icon Drag the icon to the Trash  You can   t throw away a  desktop printer icon while the printer is printing a document   You can  create another desktop printer icon for that printer whenever you like    Note  You must always have at least one printer icon on your desktop  If  you throw away the last icon  it will immediately be created again         Rename the icon Rename the icon as you would any other Finder icon  Click  the name to highlight it  then type the new name  This changes the name of  the icon  not the name of the printer         Movetheicon You may drag the 
146. formation Service  NIS   please see the NIS  manual for instructions on setting up an IP name and address     Make sure the 1pd daemon is running on the Sun OS or Ultrix system by typing the  following command at the UNIX prompt    ps aux   grep lpd   If the 1pd daemon is running  you should see output similar to    root 135 0 0 030 S2 0 7 INW Oct 17 0201 7usr 1lib lpr  and you should skip to step 5     If the lod daemon is not running  you will not see any output  and you  should start the daemon by logging in as root and typing this command at  the UNIX prompt     Just  lab  ipa  You can verify that the daemon is running by using the ps command  described in this step     Note  To start the lod daemon automatically when the system boots  make  sure that lines similar to the following existin the  etc rc file    if    f  usr lib ipd 7    then   rm  I  dev printer  var spool lipd lock   Vasty libby lpdsecho   n T printer    f1    Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users   127    128    What to do next    Chapter 4    Add the following entry tothe  etc printcap file   local_print_queue_name     description_of_printer         lp  mx 0 rm printer_I P_name        rp remote_print_queue_name        sd path_to_this_queues_spool_directory        1    path_to_this_queues_log_file    For a description of these parameters  see    Getting UNIX Users Started  Using the Printer     earlier in this chapter   Create the spool directory that you specified in step 5   mkdir path_to_this_queues_sp
147. gs 186  Fonts settings 184  Job Control settings 187  opening 178 179  Paper settings 180 181  PostScript settings 182 183  197  specifying a different port 80  175  Watermark settings 188   190  printer setup kit  installing items  from 8   24  printer software  configuring after adding memory  Macintosh 150  Windows 150  152  186  configuring for optional sheet  feeder 150 152  installing  Macintosh 44   48  74 75  156 158  Windows 78   81  174   176  removing desktop printer software   Macintosh 335 337    printing  to a PostScript file  Windows  196 199  from a UNIX workstation 202  automatic vs  manual 204  color and grayscale documents   Macintosh 166  cover page  Macintosh 165  DOS notes for 199  finishing before closing the network  connection  Macintosh 62  Windows 104  font samples  Macintosh 57  Windows 102  lines stairstep off the page  UNIX 251  monitoring with PrintMonitor 337  no paper comes out of the printer  IBM PC or compatible 249 250  Macintosh 248     printer can   t print    message  IBM PC or compatible 249  Macintosh 248  print queue functions  Macintosh  171 172  ReadMe file  Macintosh 48  Startup pages  Macintosh 59  Windows 102  switching between printers  Macintosh  161 162  test page  UNIX 118  transparencies 164  169  troubleshooting 247   252  turning tray switching on or off  Macintosh 168  Windows 186  UNIX document generates PostScript  errors 251  using automatic tray switching  Macintosh 61  Windows 103 104    using Macintosh desktop print
148. h a Windows  document 187    errors  reporting printing errors   Macintosh 167  error timeout setting  Macintosh 63   etc hosts UNIX file 119   etc printcap UNIX file 118   119  120  Ethernet address  viewing  Macintosh 65  Windows 104  Ethernet network  connecting to 30 32  initial TCP IP setup for UNIX  112 118  setting up Apple Print Monitor   Windows 82 83  Ethernet port 2  29  communication settings for 40  41  Ethernet transceivers 30  31  34  EtherTalk  See AppleTalk  Express Installation of printer software   Windows 79  174  175  extensions  turning off  Macintosh  45  156  external hard disks  connecting 137 139  downloading removing fonts   Macintosh 55 57  from manufacturers other than  Apple 144  not recognized 247    F    face down and face up output trays  2  210  229   faded print 237  239   feature list of the printer 1   Features dialog box  Windows printer  Setup 186   feeder  See sheet feeder   feeder base  positioning 131   132   filters  replacing air and ozone filters  317 319    fixed size fonts  See bitmapped fonts  Font Downloader  Windows  191 192  193  195  font handling  adding hard disks and 137  adding RAM and 144  fonts  See also Adobe Type Manager   ATM   Apple classic fonts 289  bitmapped 278  281 282  downloadable 290  downloading  to a hard disk 137  Macintosh 55 56  Windows 109 110  187  190 192  examining on screen 280  installing removing ATM Type 1  fonts  Windows 109 110  Macintosh search order 283  not all Macintosh fonts appear in th
149. h the unique pathname of the file  where error information from the 1pd command will be logged     Here   s an example of a printcap entry that allow users to print both text  and other files to the same printer     Example   KeithsLW  LaserWriter_12 600 PS      gt  lp  mx 0 rm LaserWriterFloor2      rp raw      sd  usr spool lpd KeithsLw        lf  usr spool lpd printerlog    120 Chapter 4    3     Type the following command to change directories     cd  usr spool lipd    4 Create and set the privileges for the two spool directories specified in step 2  as shown  in this example     Example    mkdir KeithsLWw   chown daemon KeithsLWw  chgrp daemon KeithsLw  chmod 775 KeithsLw    Notes on configuring specific UNIX systems    The following sections describe how to configure certain UNIX systems     Configuring HP UX version 8 07    1 Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer  as described in    Step 3  Assigning an  IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter     2 Make sure the printer   s IP name and IP address are entered inthe  etc hosts file   3 Login to the system console as root     The System Administration Manager  SAM  uses a screen oriented interface  that works best at the console     4 Run the SAM utility by typing sam at the UNIX prompt     5 Select the following options  in order  from the SAM menu   Peripheral devices  Printers and Plotters  Actions    Add a Remote Printer  Do not select    Add a Network Printer         A form appears for you to
150. han text  you may need to change  cartridges more often   For product specifications  see Appendix A      1 Before you do anything  notice some important features on the toner cartridge carousel     You use this knob to turn the carousel   Notice the arrows that show the  direction to turn the knob                                     You insert a toner  cartridge into this opening                                      Colored tabs show  which color toner  cartridge belongs  in each position     IMPORTANT The toner cartridge carousel inside the printer has a specific place  for each color  You cannot place colors in the wrong location     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   19    20    Chapter 1    Press the knob that rotates the carousel and turn the knob clockwise     Pressing the knob releases the locking mechanism so the carousel can turn        As you turn the knob   the carousel turns         a      Press the knob firmly   then begin turning it  clockwise                     T                                                    Problem  If you try to turn the knob  but it won t turn  you haven t pressed the  knob far enough to release the carousel     As soon as the carousel starts to turn  you can stop pressing on the knob   Release the pressure and continue turning     3    Turn gently until the carousel locks into a new position     Notice that the color of  the tabs has changed                                                                                    
151. he Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS for use  with IBM PCs or compatible computers running Windows or DOS  It  provides detailed procedures for setting up the printer for use on a Novell  NetWare network and instructions for installing and using Apple Print  Monitor for Windows and the Apple Printer Utility for Windows  provided  with your printer     System requirements    To use the printer  your computer system must meet these requirements     IBM PC or compatible  with an 80386 or higher CPU  hard disk drive  at least 4 megabytes  MB  of random access memory  RAM     Microsoft Windows 3 1 or higher or Windows for Workgroups 3 11  or higher    MS DOS version 3 3 or higher  5 0 or higher recommended   3 5 inch floppy disk drive that reads 144 MB disks  NetWare requires an 80386 CPU with NetWare version 30 or higher    each user of the Apple Printer Utility or Apple Print Monitor must have  NetWare Client Software for Windows 3 12 or 4 x installed    Installing all the printer software for the IBM PC or compatible computer  requires approximately 3 5 MB of free space on your hard disk     11    78    Before you begin    Set up the printer as described in Chapter 1  remembering to    unpack and prepare the printer        connect the printer to your NetWare network using Ethernet cables or  through a direct parallel connection to a PC  To connect the printer directly  to your IBM PC or compatible computer  you must use a special parallel  interface cable  part number M4235ZM A  avai
152. he PostScript header contains instructions that a  PostScript printer needs to print documents created by the driver  If your  printer is connected directly to your computer only  you can save time by  choosing the Download button to send the PostScript header only once     when you switch on your printer  Download Each Job tells the driver to  send the PostScript header with every document  Already Downloaded  tells the driver not to send the PostScript header with documents   Download tells the driver to send the header when you choose the  Download button       Error Handler Tells the driver to send a special PostScript error handler with  every document you print  The error handler prints a page with a  PostScript error message when a document fails to print correctly  You can  use this option as an aid in troubleshooting print job problems       Font Control This advanced feature tells the driver not to download fonts  when printing documents  Use this option if you know that the fonts you  use in your documents are always available to the printer     Windows and DOS Users 187    188    Chapter 7    Watermark    Click the Watermark tab to display the Watermark tab dialog box  which  contains options for defining  editing  and deleting watermarks          Apple Color LaserWriter 12 600 on LPT1        Paper   Features   Fonts             Select a Watermark     Shirley s watermark    Display area       Help   Cancel   OK      The following list describes the settings in the
153. he Printers icon to display the Printers dialog box   Select the printer you want to set up from the List of Installed Printers   Choose Setup to display the Setup dialog box for the printer     You can also use the Printers dialog box to select a default printer  to switch  the Print Manager on and off  and to connect your printer to a different port     Opening the printer setup dialog box from your application  Most applications have a Print Setup command in their File menus   Choose the Print Setup command from the File menu    This command usually displays the Print Setup dialog box    If you are using more than one printer  select the printer you want to set up     Click the Options  or Setup  button to display the Setup dialog box     Note  The names of the commands and buttons used to display the printer  Setup dialog box vary from program to program  See your programs  documentation for the precise command and button names it uses     Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Print Manager    From the Program Manager  double click the Print Manager icon to display the Print  Manager     Select the printer you want to set up from the list of Printers     Choose the Setup or Printer Setup command from the Options menu to display the Setup  dialog box for your printer     Windows and DOS Users   179    180    selecting printer options in the Setup dialog box    Chapter 7       You can change the most commonly used printer settings from the Setup  dialog box   The ta
154. he printer  Inspect the stack of paper  and remove any paper that is  misaligned                               Check both paper  cassettes and remove  any paper that is misaligned           Standard paper  cassette                   Universal paper  cassette    If you have installed an optional 250 sheet feeder  see    Clearing Paper from  the Optional Feeder     later in this chapter     Clearing paper from the transfer drum                The paper jam is in the transfer drum area   You must open the front door and the top cover     To unlock the transfer drum  If you need to rotate the drum to release  push this lever  the jammed paper  turn this knob           Note  Don t let loose toner get on  the window of the density sensor              Gently remove the jammed  paper  You may have to pull it  loose from the small clips on  the drum  Pull the paper at a  slight angle  not straight up                                       Clearing Paper Jams   233    If you can t see the paper when you rotate the transfer drum  close the locking  lever  close the top cover  and close the printer   s door  Then open the access  door to the paper pickup area and look for the paper jam there                                                              The paper jam is in  the fuser area     1  Ifi  s open  close the face up output tray     234   Chapter 11    2    4    Open the fuser access door     To move the paper toward  you  press and release this  lever  Repeat until the paper  is c
155. he printer to print the watermark in the foreground  rather than in the background  the default   Choose this setting if you  cannot see the watermark on the printed page     m Print Outline Only Tells the printer to print only the outline of the watermark   Choose this setting if the watermark is covering graphic images in the  document     m Angle Lets you specify the angle at which the watermark will display on  the page     Windows and DOS Users   189    190        Color Lets you specify red  green  and blue values for the color in which  the watermark is printed  As an alternative  Choose Color brings up a  Color dialog box that lets you view and select a color for the watermark       Position Automatically Center Watermark Position Relative to Center Tells the  driver how to position the watermark  Automatically Center Watermark  centers the watermark on the page  Position Relative to Center lets you  specify x and y coordinates for the watermark relative to the center     Downloading fonts    Chapter 7    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS uses downloadable PostScript fonts  which  are a type of soft font  The PostScript Printer Driver automatically downloads  any Type 1 fonts from your computer s hard disk to the printers memory as  needed for each document that you print  You can also use the driver to  manually download fonts to the printer   s memory or to a hard disk installed or  connected to the printer when you don t want to download fonts for each  document  Manu
156. he relevant color    a Try printing on a high quality paper to see if that helps    m Make sure youre printing the image on the correct side of the paper     a Replace the photoconductor cartridge     A page prints completely black        Try these steps     a   Make sure the photoconductor cartridge is properly installed   For  instructions  see Chapter 1      m Replace the photoconductor cartridge     a Call an Apple authorized service provider   A page prints completely blank        Try these steps     m Make sure the sealing tape has been removed from the toner cartridge   For  instructions  see Chapter 1      m Replace the toner cartridge       The printer may have picked up two sheets of paper and printed on one but  not the other     a Call an Apple authorized service provider   Some printed segments in a page appear faded        Try these steps       Make sure the paper is not damp     a Try printing on a high quality paper to see if that helps     Fixing Image Problems    239    240    Chapter 12    Stains appear on the back of a printed page        Try these steps        Clean the separation discharger wire   For instructions  see Chapter 10       Clean the density sensor   For instructions  see Chapter 10     a Try printing on a high quality paper to see if that helps      The transfer cleaning brush may need to be replaced  Call an Apple   authorized service provider     Flakes of toner come off the printed page        Try these steps     m Make sure you removed t
157. he two orange spacers from the fuser area when  you unpacked and set up the printer   For instructions  see Chapter 1      a Try printing on a high quality paper to see if that helps   m Replace the photoconductor cartridge     a Call an Apple authorized service provider     Color print quality problems  Horizontal bands appear on the printed page     When you print solid color images you can expect some horizontal banding   fine horizontal lines that are more obvious in solid color areas   To minimize  banding  try these steps     m Banding is more likely with 30 to 60 percent print coverage  Try a different  pattern with more white space or more coverage     a Use light background color  rather than dark       Replace the toner cartridge containing the associated color     m Replace the photoconductor cartridge   You cannot get smooth color gradients in printed pages     Try these steps     a Make sure the application program youre using lets you print the colors  you want         Replace the toner cartridge containing the associated color       Replace the photoconductor cartridge     White gap appears between adjacent color         From the Print Quality pop up menu  in the Print Options dialog box    choose Best     a Change the colors  Choose colors that are closer to each other in the  spectrum   For example  with red and green  there   s more white gap  with  blue and green  the white gap is reduced      Fixing Image Problems   241    242    Chapter 12    Text or obje
158. hernet address 65  Working with a NetWare network 66  Changing TCP IP configurations 68  Viewing and changing communication settings 70  Sending PostScript files to the printer 72  Restarting the printer 72  Getting Macintosh users started using the printer 73  Instructions for users 73  Software for users 73  Preparing a server so users can install over a network 74  Installing the printer software from the server 7 5    What todo next 76    Contents   vii    viii    Contents    3 Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users 77    System requirements 77  Before you begin 78  Installing the software the printer administratror needs 78  Installing software for Windows NT 81  Using Apple Print Monitor 81  Initial Apple Print Monitor for Windows setup   82  Making sure everything is working 83  Initial Novell NetWare setup 83  Step 1  Choosing an operating mode 84  What todo next 85  Using PCONSOLE 86    Step 2  option A  Setting up the printer as a print server   using PCONSOLE  87    Step 2  option B  Setting up the printer as a remote printer   RPRINTER mode  92    Step 3  Assigning a password for the print server  optional  97  Step 4  Setting up the PostScript printer driver for NetWare 98  Step 5  Making sure everything is working 98   Step 6  Setting up client computers for network printing 98  What todo next 98    Setting additional printer parameters with the Apple Printer Utility for  Windows 99    Installing the Apple Printer Utility for Windows 100  Opening a
159. hooser from the File menu    The Chooser dialog box appears    Click the LaserWriter 8 icon     If your network has zones  click the printer   s zone to select it  If your network doesn   t  have zones  skip to step 4     Double click the printer name     The printer software automatically checks the printer   s options and selects the  correct settings     Close the Chooser     6    Designating the 250 sheet feeder as the preferred paper source    You can tell the printer to use the optional feeder as the preferred paper  source  If you do  and you choose Auto Select in the Print dialog box  the  printer looks first in the 250 sheet feeder for paper  If it   s out of paper  the  printer looks in the standard cassette     For more information about how the printer uses paper sources  see     Setting Paper Handling Options    in Chapter 2 if you have a Macintosh   or in Chapter 3 if you have a Windows computer     Choose the Chooser from the File menu   In the Chooser dialog box  click the LaserWriter 8 icon     If your network has zones  click the printer   s zone to select it  If your network doesn   t  have zones  skip to step 4     Click the printer   s name   Click Setup     The Printer Setup dialog box appears     Current Printer Description File  PPO  Selected      LaserWriter Color 12 600 P        Auto Setup Select PPO          Click Configure     Installing Options    151    152    Chapter 5    7    In the dialog box that appears  choose Installed or Installed and Pre
160. icon anywhere you like on the desktop   However  you may not move it off the desktop       Create an alias for the icon You may create an alias for the icon as you would  any Finder icon  by selecting the icon and choosing the Make Alias  command from the File menu  The alias may be moved anywhere on or off  the desktop     Determining the status of a printer by looking at its icon    Chapter 6    You can tell the status of a printer by looking at its desktop icon     Plain icon indicates a printer Stopped icon indicates you have  that is not currently chosen Stopped the print queue   for printing   Default icon indicates the printer Error icon indicates there is an  you have currently chosen to error on this printer  Double click  print on  the icon to see a message   z Printing icon indicates a Disabled icon indicates this   document is printing on this desktop printer is not available    printer  See Chapter 13     Switching between printers    If you have more than one printer available  you must select which printer you  want to use  The printer you select is called the default printer     A bold outline around the desktop printer icon indicates that  this is the default printer  where all your documents will print     until you indicate otherwise   A plain outline around the desktop printer icon indicates that  this is not the default printer     To change the default printer  use one of these three methods  as described in  the next sections     a   Drag the document y
161. ilation  Position the printer so  that the fan exhaust does not blow directly into anyone s face     Technical Information and Printer Supplies   265    266    Communication settings    Appendix A    The following table shows the default communication settings  For  information about using the configuration switch to adjust communications  settings  see    Adjusting Communication Settings    in Chapter 1  To change or  view the current communication settings  use the Apple Printer Utility on the  Macintosh  see Chapter 2 for details  or the Apple Printer Utility for  Windows on an IBM PC or compatible computer  see Chapter 3 for details      Right switch position    These are the factory default settings     Port Mode Data Protocol  Parallel On AutoSelect TBCP  Port Interface Mode  LocalTalk LocalTalk On  Ethernet EtherTalk On   Netware On  Parallel TCP IP On    Accessories    The following list includes both standard and optional parts     Item    Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS Setup Kit   Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge  Cyan   Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge  Magenta  Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge  Yellow   Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge  Black   Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS 250 Sheet Feeder  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS Universal Cassette  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS Internal Hard Disk Drive  Color LaserWriter Photoconductor Replacement Kit  110 V Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement Kit  220 V Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement Kit  Color LaserWriter Fuser Oil   Co
162. ing ATPS     Connecting to an IBM PC or compatible with a parallel cable    Obtain a parallel interface cable like this one     IMPORTANT You must purchase this cable  part number M4235ZM A   designed for the parallel port on the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  If you try  to use any other cable  you may damage the printer   s parallel port        Mini 25 pin    connector connector    Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    35    36    Chapter 1    Use the parallel cable to connect the computer to the printer     Attach the cable   s smaller connector  to this port on the printer     aes      ere   taol LA    SMES    a       Attach the cable to the parallel port on a    your computer   Your computer s parallel  port may be in a different location             IUT  U                            MNN                                     A       Parallel interface cable    Check to make sure the port selected in the dialog box matches the one you connected  the printer to     Open the Control Panels  then open the Printers control panel and check the  settings in the Setup Printer dialog   LPT1 is the recommended setting    What to do after connecting directly to an IBM PC or compatible    Connect the power cable and turn on the printer  as explained later in this  chapter  For more information about setting up the printer  see Chapter 3     Connecting the power and turning on the printer    Once youve connected the printer to your networks  youre ready to start up  the printer  
163. ing command     lp  da printer_queue_name filename    If the test print doesn   t work    If the test document doesn   t print  follow these steps   Check whether the rip daemon is running  At the UNIX prompt  type  ps  e   grep rlp    If the process is running  you will see one or more lines of text  if it is not  running  you will see no response     If rlp is running   that is  you saw one or more lines of text in step 1    kill the process  by typing    kill  15 process_number_from_step_l    Make sure the following entry is inthe  etc inetd conf file     printer stream tcp nowait root     usr lib rilpdaemon rlpdaemon  i    This line tells inetd to start the rlp daemon automatically when a print  request is made  if it   s not already running      Make sure the following entry is inthe  etc services file     printer 515 tcp spooler    Start inetd by typing the following command at the UNIX prompt      etc inetd  c    Repeat the steps in    Configuring HP UX Version 8 07        Configuring HP UX version 9 xx    Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer  as described in    Step 3  Assigning an  IP Address to the Printer     earlier in this chapter     Make sure the printer   s IP name and IP address are entered inthe  etc hosts file   Log in to the system console as root     The System Administration Manager  SAM  uses a screen oriented interface  that works best at the console     Run the SAM utility by typing sam at the UNIX prompt     Setting Up the Printer for UNIX
164. int Quality Mode  _Printer   s default v   To save your Print  S  oo Quality Mode setting  as the printer s default  setting  click Save        Choose Fastest  Best  or Printer   s Default    You select the default   automatic tray switching  on or off   in the Apple Printer Utility     Macintosh Users   169    170    Printing while using the computer for other work    Chapter 6    With background printing turned on  you can use your Macintosh for other  work while youre printing     To turn background printing on  follow these steps   Select Chooser from the Apple menu    In the Chooser dialog box  click the LaserWriter 8 icon   Click to turn background printing on or off    Background Printing    PEPPCEEE ETI Ee CE CET CUErPree eer re eerreceeteerreecrepcrreer COPE erer cere ce  Cerer ee reer rere re cece Click On or Off     Ca Active  Ppp renee    Inactive          Close the Chooser     Once background printing is turned on  it is in effect whenever you print   until you turn it off  When you click Print in the Print dialog box  a message  appears for a moment to tell you the document is being prepared  Once the  message disappears  you can continue other work  Your computer may pause  occasionally while it processes the document for printing  See    Monitoring  and Controlling Background Printing     next  for more information     Monitoring and controlling background printing    If you are using background printing  you can use the desktop printer features  to monitor an
165. intosh package from Novell  extends  full queue and spooling services to Macintosh clients from a server based  software process     There are advantages to each type of operating mode  Your choice will  depend on your networking environment and the types of jobs you will be  printing  Regardless of your choice  you can locate the printer anywhere on  the network     What to do next    Once you decide how you want to set up the printer  proceed as follows       PSERVER To set up the printer as a print server  read about how to use  PCONSOLE in the next section  then      if you want a simple setup  read    Step 2  Option A  Setting Up the  Printer as a Print Server  Using PCONSOLE      later in this chapter       if you want to assign a password  read    Step 3  Assigning a Password for  the Print Server  Optional   later in this chapter         RPRINTER To set up the printer as a remote printer  read about how to use    PCONSOLE in the next section  then skip to    Step 2  Option B  Setting Up  the Printer as a Remote Printer  RPRINTER Mode      later in this chapter     For both PSERVER and RPRINTER  you must also follow the instructions in     Step 4  Setting Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare     later in this  chapter     For more information about using the Apple Printer Utility  read    Setting  Additional Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for Windows     later in  this chapter     For instructions on setting up the printer for access by Macintosh cli
166. ion about installing and using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows   see Chapter 3     Windows and DOS Users   199         UNIX Users    The details of setting up your UNIX workstation depend on which type of  UNIX youre running  In most cases  the setup requires superuser privileges  and knowledge of the  etc hosts and  etc printcap files and should  be done by your local network or printer administrator  as described in  Chapter 4     Once this setup is complete  your network or printer administrator will tell  you the name of the printer   s local print queues and what sort of documents  should be sent to which queue     201    202    Printing from a UNIX workstation to the printer    Chapter 8    You don   t need any special software to use the printer  On most UNIX  systems  you use either the lpr or lp command to print documents over a  TCP IP network to the printer   The documents must be in PostScript  format     Example for lpr    lpr  PKeithsLW file ps  Example for 1p  lp  d KeithsLW file ps    The way you print and choose printing options can differ from one  application program to another  To find out more about printing from your  application programs  read the documentation that came with the programs                 Loading Paper    This chapter describes how to load the standard paper cassette and the  multipurpose tray with paper  It describes how to load plain paper  letterhead   three hole punched paper  and transparencies for printing     You can purchas
167. is configured  you can set up users    workstations as explained in     Getting UNIX Users Started Using the Printer     later in this chapter     Configuring the printer    Though the printer itself has no control panel  you can configure it by using  programs on computers connected to the printer     m On Macintosh computers  use the Apple Printer Utility and the Chooser   s  setup function  described in Chapter 2        On IBM PC or compatible computers  use the Apple Printer Utility for  Windows  described in Chapter 3     Getting UNIX users started using the printer    As in    Initial TCP IP Setup     earlier in this chapter  the instructions in this  section describe how to set up workstations for most flavors of UNIX that use  the Remote Line Printer Daemon  1pd  protocol  These include almost all  versions of UNIX based on the Berkeley Software Distribution  BSD    including Apple   s own UNIX implementation  A UX  For information on  other systems  see    Notes on Configuring Specific UNIX Systems     later in  this chapter     Commonly  printer administrators make entries in the  etc hosts and   etc printcap files on each user   s workstation to enable them to use the  printer  The  etc hosts entry identifies the printer   s IP name and address   The  etc printcap file identifies different printing parameters     IMPORTANT This is a PostScript only printer  If you want to print text files   you must send them through a PostScript filter such as    enscript    befor
168. isk space   there are several advantages to doing so     Bitmapped fonts are hand designed  a graphic artist planned each character  in each font to look good on a screen  TrueType fonts are scaled by the  computer to match what you request  At smaller point sizes  the bitmaps may  appear sharper     Additionally  scaling fonts takes ttme   sometimes up to several seconds in  slower Macintosh computers  but all Macintosh computers can display a  bitmapped font instantly     TrueType and PostScript fonts    PostScript fonts were designed as fonts for PostScript printers  However  if  you have Adobe Type Manager software installed  your computer can both  display and print PostScript fonts     Use different names  To avoid confusing the printer software  be sure that you  don   t install both TrueType and PostScript versions of the same font  For  example  do not have a PostScript font file called Times and a TrueType font  file called Times installed in your system at the same time     Timeskom Times       How the Macintosh looks for fonts  Here   s the search order your Macintosh uses to determine which font to  display on your screen when you choose a specific size   1  an installed bitmapped font in that size  if one exists  2  a scaled TrueType font  if no bitmapped font exists    3  an Adobe Type Manager  ATM  version of a PostScript font  if ATM is  installed and if no TrueType version exists    4  a scaled bitmap if no AIM font exists   Here   s the search order it uses
169. ist  click to select it  then click the Install button     Selecting and setting up the printer    First  click this icon    If necessary  use the  scroll bar and arrows   to find the icon      Second  if the  network has zones   click one to select it     Before using your printer for the first time  you must select it in the Chooser   Once you select the printer in the Chooser  you wont need to repeat this step  unless you change printers or change the way your printer is connected     Choose the Chooser from the Apple      menu     In the Chooser dialog box  click items to select them     Chooser  I l Select a PostScript Printer                eee Third  click the name of the  Dale s Pro 630 printer you want to use       Diane s Printer      Key Access LazerW riter  amp  Firebottle If an Icon appears beside the  Frank   s Show printer name  the printer    AppleTalk Zanes   cle 7   nite software has already been  Halftime Wy Keith s Griffin Fax   Hardware Test Lab       Laserwriter 16 600 a set up     Imaging Bal Marty s Personal LW  Instruments Lab ae     l  Japan dJ  Background Printing Finally  click Setup     E   On Off      cat cf  Or double click the printer    Second Floor aa  HiH i Active  Third Floor   AppleTalk  gt  ie name   a shortcut         The Chooser identifies the type of printer and automatically sets up the  printer software  A small printer icon appears beside the printer name     Close the Chooser     After you close the Chooser  a desktop printer icon 
170. itch 2  precautions  See safety instructions  preview screen  Windows 181  printable area  changing settings   Windows 183  printcap options  UNIX 117  120  Print dialog box  Macintosh 164  printer administrator  adjusting communication  settings 40   42  configuring the printer for IBM PC or  compatible computers 99 110  getting started  Macintosh 73 75  initial TCP IP setup for UNIX  112 118  installing hardware options 129 152  installing software  fonts  and  configuring the printer   Macintosh 44 72  installing software for IBM PC or  compatible computers 78   83  overview of responsibilities xx xxil  setting up and connecting the printer  3   42  setting up the printer for a Novell  NetWare network 83   98  printer Connect dialog box  Windows  197 199  printer driver  Macintosh installation problems  245 246  settings are ignored on an IBM PC or  compatible 250  setting options  Windows 178 179  printer features window  Apple Printer  Utility  Macintosh 51 53  Printer Information category settings   Apple Printer Utility   Macintosh 53    printer information  viewing  Macintosh 53  Windows 101  printer location  identifying  Macintosh 54  Windows 102  printer mode for receiving data   Windows 187  printer output format  Windows 180  Printer Preferences category settings  Apple Printer Utility for Windows  101 103  Apple Printer Utility  Macintosh  53 60  Printer Selector window  Apple Printer  Utility  Macintosh 51  52  printer Setup dialog box  Windows  Features settin
171. ity sensor  cleaning  223 225  237  240  desktop printer icons  Macintosh  159 161  171  246  desktop printer software  removing   Macintosh 335 337  device list for Windows  adding a hard  disk to 193 194  diagnosing problems from the status  panel 323 334  dialog boxes  Macintosh  Page Setup 162 163  Print 164  Print Options 165 169  dialog boxes  Windows  NetWare Printer Connections 176  printer Connect 197   199  printer Setup 80  175  178   179  Features 186  Fonts 184 185  Job Control 187  Paper 180 181  PostScript 182 183  197  Watermark 188   190    dimensions of the printer 261  disks  backup copies of 44  write protecting 78  174  disposal box cover 13  18  296  disposing of used components  photoconductor cartridges 221  331  toner cartridges 219  toner disposal boxes 220  330  DOS notes for mapping to a  print queue 199  DOS Windows computers  See Apple  Printer Utility for Windows   IBM PC or compatible  computers  Windows  downloadable fonts 290  downloading fonts  to a hard disk 137  Macintosh 55 56  Windows 109 110  187  190 192  downloading PostScript files  Macintosh 72  Windows 108    E    Easy Install of printer software   Macintosh 45   46  157   158  Encapsulated PostScript files  See  EPS files  energy saving mode  adjusting the idle  delay 39  Macintosh 60  249  UNIX 252  Windows 103  250  environmental information about the  printer 262  EPS files  printing  Macintosh 72  Windows 108  196  saving documents as  Macintosh 164  error handler  sending wit
172. l boxes  For information on how to  return the used toner disposal box to the manufacturer  see the instructions  that come in the package with the photoconductor and new toner disposal  boxes  By returning used toner disposal boxes  you help reduce waste and  preserve the environment     Photoconductor cartridge is wearing out    When the photoconductor cartridge is near the end of its life  the Alert and  photoconductor lights glow  When the photoconductor is completely worn  out  the printer stops working until you replace the photoconductor cartridge   For information about ordering replacement supplies  see Appendix A                 When the photoconductor is wearing out  Photoconductor  the Alert and photoconductor lights glow  cartridge    Instructions for replacing the photoconductor cartridge come in the package  with the new photoconductor and two toner disposal boxes   You use two  toner disposal boxes during the lifetime of one photoconductor cartridge      If the light comes on in the middle of a printing job  and the output is still  satisfactory  continue printing if you wish  You won t harm the printer by  doing so     Note  Don   t throw away the used photoconductor cartridge  For information  on how to return the used photoconductor to the manufacturer  see the  instructions that come with the new photoconductor  By returning the used  photoconductor cartridge  you help reduce waste and preserve the  environment     Diagnosing Problems for Service   331    
173. lable separately from your  Apple dealer        plug in and turn on the printer  Keep the startup page that automatically  prints out  It provides the default printer name you need for setup      Installing the software the printer administrator needs    Chapter 3    As the printer administrator  you must install the printer software on each  computer that will print to the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  To do this  use  the installation program that comes on the software disks included with the  printer     The instructions that follow assume that you have a mouse or similar pointing  device     Find the Windows disks that came with the printer and make sure they re write   protected     Slide up the write protection tab in one corner of the floppy disk so that you  can see through the hole     Start Windows     Before installing the software  make sure the Windows Control Panel and  Printers control panel are closed     Insert Printer Disk 1 for Windows into a floppy disk drive     10    Read the README TXT file on this disk to check for late breaking news   You can do this with Windows Notepad or another word processor   From the Windows Program Manager  choose Run from the File menu     Type a  setup or b  setup  depending on which drive holds your installation  disk  in the command line field and click OK     After a few moments  a welcome message is displayed that allows you to  select Express Installation  Custom Installation  or De Install     Express Installation insta
174. lassic is a registered trademark licensed to apple Computer  Inc  Helvetica  Palatino  and  Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries     ExposurePro is a registered trademark of Baseline Publishing     ITC Avant Garde  ITC Bookman  ITC Zapf Chancery  and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered  trademarks of International Typeface Corporation     Lucida is a registered trademark of Bigelow and Holmes    MS DOS is a registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation   NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell  Inc    QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark  Inc    Sun is a trademark of Sun Microsystems  Inc     SuperPaint is a trademark of Aldus Corporation  a subsidiary of Adobe Systems Incorporated   which may be registered in certain jurisdictions     Ultrix is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation     UNIX is a registered trademark of Novell  Inc   in the U S  and other countries  licensed  exclusively through X Open Company  Ltd     Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada     Mention of third party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an  endorsement nor a recommendation  Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the  performance or use of these products     Contents Overview    Preface    Part    1    ar Aa GW N    Part Il    oOo co nN    How Much of This Book Do   Have to Read  xix    Guide for Printer Administrators   Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 1
175. later in this appendix     Diagnosing Problems for Service e 325    326    Out of paper    Appendix G    If the printer cannot find paper  the Paper Out light glows steadily  Lights on  the small printer diagram show which paper cassette needs to be refilled           Paper Out light    When the Paper Out light blinks  the printer is ready for you to feed paper  manually     For instructions on loading paper  see Chapter 9  or the quick reference  booklet that hangs inside the printer   s door      For information about recommended papers  see Appendix A     Paper jams    If paper is jammed inside the printer  the Paper Jam light glows steadily   Lights on the small printer diagram show which doors provide access to the  paper jam                       The lights on this diagram identify Paper Jam light  the access doors nearest the paper jam     For instructions on clearing paper jams  see Chapter 11  or the quick  reference booklet that hangs inside the printer   s door      For information about recommended papers  see Appendix A     Diagnosing Problems for Service    327    Regular maintenance    For information about ordering replacement supplies  see Appendix A     Low toner    If a toner cartridge is low or empty  the printer keeps working but print  quality suffers     A light indicates  which color is low                 When toner is low  the Alert light glows  and a toner light comes on   When you see these lights  it can mean one of two things     m The toner powd
176. lection   Macintosh 246   no paper comes out of the printer   IBM PC or compatible 249 250  Macintosh 248      out of memory    message    Macintosh 247    Index   355    paper problems 204    PostScript errors generated by UNIX    documents 251     printer can   t print    message  IBM PC or compatible 249  Macintosh 248  printer door won   t close 244  printer driver installation problems   Macintosh 245   246  printer driver settings are ignored   IBM PC or compatible 250  printer naming problems   Macintosh 246  printer won   t draw paper from the  multipurpose tray  IBM PC or  compatible 251  printing spreadsheets or graphics    using Novell NetWare  IBM PC    or compatible 251  printing the first page takes a  long time  IBM PC or compatible 250  Macintosh 249  UNIX 252  print quality problems 237   242    toner cartridge carousel knob doesn   t    turn 20  245  vertical lines on printed pages 238  working with desktop printer icons   Macintosh 246  TrueType fonts  Adobe Type Manager  ATM  and  110  282  283  creating or substituting PostScript  fonts for  Windows 184   185  described 280  working with other types of fonts  281 283  turning on or off  Adobe Type Manager  ATM  110  automatic tray switching  Macintosh 61  Windows 103 104    356 Index    background printing  Macintosh 170  demonstration page  Macintosh 59  Windows 102  extensions  Macintosh 45  156  paper handling options  Macintosh 61  Windows 103 104  the printer 37   38  250 sheet feeder  See sheet feed
177. ler checks to make sure you have what you need to use  the printer software  If youre missing anything  a message tells you what you  need  You wont be able to install the printer software until you correct the  problem  If a dialog box says you don   t have the correct system software  you  can purchase a new version from an Apple authorized dealer     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   45    46    7    Make sure the disk  named here is the  one on which you  want to install the   printer software     Chapter 2    In the Installer dialog box  click the Install button     Installer Script    Easy Install kal    2 Macintosh printer software for Apple LaserWriter PostScript    Printers       When you re ready to  Your Hard Disk 2 begin  click Install        The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and  then begins to install files     Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete   When you see a message reporting that installation was successful  click Restart   The Installer restarts your Macintosh     The software is now installed on the hard disk  If you turned off any  automatic virus detection programs on your Macintosh  turn them  on again     Note  If installation is not successful  see Chapter 13 for suggestions     More information about the Installer program    In the procedure just described  the Installer places all the software you need  on your hard disk  In rare circumstances  you many want to inst
178. ling SIMMs 145 149     out of memory    message   Macintosh 247  performance improvements after  adding 144  242  possible configurations 146  printer requirements 144   146  upgrade specifications 265  RAM expansion kits 145  RARP  Remote Address Resolution  Protocol  method for assigning  an IP address to the printer   UNIX 113  116  253    Read Me file  Macintosh 48  README  TXT file  Windows  79  174  Ready In Use light 39  324  reinitializing a previously used  hard disk 137  Remote Line Printer Daemon  Ipd   protocol  UNIX 112  119  remote printer  NetWare network setting  Macintosh 66  Windows 105  setting up the printer as  ATPS 270 275  NetWare 92   96  UNIX 117 118  removing  desktop printer software  Macintosh  335 337  fonts  Macintosh 57  SIMMs 148  renaming desktop printer icons 160  reorder numbers for Apple printer  supplies 268  reporting method for Macintosh printing  errors 167  resolution specifications 259  restarting the Macintosh 46  158  restarting the printer  Macintosh 72  Windows 108  retaining clips on connector 148  RGB color 291  rotated landscape orientation 180  RPRINTER operating mode  NetWare  84  92   96  105    S    safety instructions  See also Apple   authorized service provider   maintenance  cleaning interior parts of the printer  223 226  cleaning the exterior of the  printer 222  cleaning up spilled fuser oil 304  conditions that warrant disconnecting  the printer 4  fuser oil spills 11  general precautions 5  217  grounding wrist str
179. lls all the software you need  It creates the Apple  LaserWriter Software program group and installs within it the ReadMe file   Apple Print Monitor for Windows and the Apple Printer Utility for Windows   which you use to name the printer and perform various printer administrative  functions  It also installs Adobe Type Manager    with Type 1 fonts  corresponding to the fonts in the printer   s ROM     Custom Installation lets you specify what portions of the software you would  like to install  De Install lets you remove previously installed LaserWriter  software     Click Express Installation     A window appears that keeps you informed as file decompression proceeds   Insert other printer disks  and click OK  as the program asks for them     Instructions appear describing the next three steps in the installation  procedure  Take a moment to read them     Click Continue   The Adobe Printers control panel appears   Select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS and click OK     The PostScript Printer Driver files and other software are installed on the  hard disk  A message appears telling you that the driver software was  successfully installed     Click OK to dismiss the message     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   79    80    Chapter 3    Select another Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer  if any  and click OK to install  Repeat  for each printer you want to install     When your re done  click Close     A message appears telling you to use the Printers cont
180. lor LaserWriter Transparencies A4   Color LaserWriter Transparencies Letter   Apple HDI 30 SCSI Cable   Apple Ethernet Thin Coax Transceiver   Apple Ethernet Twisted Pair Transceiver   Apple Ethernet AUI Adapter   Apple IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable   Apple SCSI Cable Extender   Apple SCSI Cable Terminator II  Black     Part number    M3753G A  M3757G A  M3760G A  M3758G A  M3756G A  M3762G A  M3874G A  M3875G A  M3761G A  M3867G A  M4234G A  M3755G A  M3877G A  M3876G A  M2538LL A  MO329LL A  M0437LL A  M0432LL A  M4235ZM A  M0208  M5871G A    Technical Information and Printer Supplies    267    Supplies    In the U S A   for Color LaserWriter supplies direct from Apple  call  1 800 600 7805  For your reference  the product reorder numbers are listed  below     In the U S A   to locate your local Apple authorized reseller  call  1 800 538 9696 and ask for extension 525     For optimal print quality  use Apple printer supplies     Item Reorder number  Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge  Cyan M3757G A  Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge  Magenta M3760G A  Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge  Yellow M3758G A  Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge  Black M3756G A  Color LaserWriter Photoconductor Cartridge Replacement Kit M3761G A   includes 2 toner disposal boxes    110 V Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement Kit M3867G A  220 V Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement Kit M4234G A  Color LaserWriter Fuser Oil M3755G A  Color LaserWriter Transparencies  Letter Size  M3876G A  Color LaserWriter Tra
181. lp moving the printer  It takes at least two people to move it safely     2 Remove the two screws that hold the controller board in place                    WARNING When installing the hard drive  avoid touching the surface of  the printer   s controller board with hands or tools to avoid damaging or  scratching the printed circuits     140   Chapter 5    Grasp the metal frame of the controller board and slide it out of the printer     Place the board next to the printer   When you put on the grounding wrist  strap  you want to be able to reach the controller board easily      IMPORTANT Be sure to put on the grounding wrist strap before handling the  hard disk or any internal printer parts  The strap grounds you to the printer   preventing any static discharge that might harm the controller board or  printer  Wearing the strap cannot harm you  If you can t find the grounding  wrist strap that comes with the internal hard disk  you can purchase one from  a computer dealer     Wrap the end of the grounding strap that does not have copper foil on it around your  wrist     The strap   s light adhesive coating keeps it attached to your wrist  while  allowing for easy removal     Remove the backing from the piece of copper foil at the other end of the strap     Attach the copper foil end of the strap to the metal surface on the inside of the printer by  pressing the adhesive backing against the metal     SS end  Metal surface k    Do aa                         Installing Options   
182. ltiple external hard disks   Turn off the printer and all hard disks connected to it    Attach the HDI 30 SCSI System cable to the SCSI port on the printer    Attach the other end of the cable to the SCSI port on the first hard disk    Attach a peripheral cable to the other SCSI port on the first hard disk    Attach the other end of the peripheral cable to either SCSI port on the next hard disk   Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each additional hard disk     Attach a cable terminator to the unused SCSI port on the last hard disk     Installing Options    139    Adding an internal hard disk    To create additional space to store fonts in your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   you can purchase an internal hard disk  To install the internal hard disk  you  remove the controller board from the printer  connect the hard disk to the  board  and replace the board in the printer  Be sure to wear a grounding wrist  strap when working on the controller board  If you can   t find the grounding  wrist strap that comes with the internal hard disk  you can purchase one from  a computer dealer     IMPORTANT These instructions explain how to install an internal hard disk  yourself  You can also contact an Apple authorized dealer who can install  your internal hard disk for a service fee     WARNING Make sure the printer is turned off and plugged in  for  grounding      1 If necessary  turn the printer so that the rear  opposite the side with the Apple logo and  printer   s name  is accessible     Get he
183. m   s Print dialog box does not  have a Print to File checkbox  however  you need to make temporary changes  to your printer setup to create a PostScript file  as described next     Using the driver to print to a PostScript file    Using the driver to print to a PostScript file is a three step process  First   change your printer setup  then use your program to create the file  and finally  reset your printer setup for normal printing     Step 1  Changing your printer setup to print to a PostScript file  From the Program Manager  open the Control Panel and double click the Printers icon   The Printers dialog box appears     If it is not already selected  select the name of the PostScript printer that you are using  from the Installed Printers list     Select Connect    The Connect dialog box appears    Select FILE from the Ports list box    You may have to scroll through the list to find this selection    Choose OK to close the Connect dialog box and return to the Printers dialog box   Choose Setup    The driver Setup dialog box appears     After changing  or confirming  your printer settings  choose OK to close the dialog box     Note  Choose settings in the PostScript Options dialog box that will produce  a file that prints correctly on the destination printer  For example  select the     Use PostScript Level 2 Features    option if you are sure that you will be  printing the file only on Level 2 printers  such as the Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS  If you plan to use a print
184. m your computer     IMPORTANT Reinitializing erases all fonts previously stored on the disk   Open the Printer Preferences category    Open the Disks category    In the panel that appears  select the disk you want to initialize and click Initialize     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Set Defaults Update Info      gt  Printer Information      Printer Preferences    gt  Hame    Location    b    gt  Fonts  we    If you turn on a disk after you   peer oo     turn on the printer  the disk  ae appears as    unmounted      Oane a  To mount the disk properly     Unmounted  you must restart the printer      If you don   t turn on a disk  it  won t appear in this panel        A message warns that initializing erases the entire contents of the disk     including any fonts     Click Initialize to proceed     It takes some time to complete the initialization process  The printer won t be  available for printing until the hard disk is initialized     The X means   the printer is set to  print the startup  page and the  demonstration page     4    Turning the startup pages on or off    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS normally prints a startup page and a  demonstration page when you turn the printer on  The startup page shows the  printer   s name  the total number of pages printed  the amount of memory   installed options  and communication settings  You can turn this feature off if  you wish     Open the Printer Preferences category   You see a list of preferences   Open the Startup Pages categor
185. me programs add more choices to the Print dialog box  For information  about such options  refer to the documentation that came with the program     Choose Print from the File menu  or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and  drop it on the printer      In the dialog box that appears  select the options you want     Printer     Montana       Copies     Pages    All    From     To            Paper Source   Destination            All    First from    Auto Select y      Printer   To print the document  Remaining from  fule spieri F    File on paper  click Printer   o To save it as a  PostScript or EPS file   click File        To print a transparency or sheet of  paper that you feed by hand  select  Manual Feed as the paper source     Printer     Montana       Copies  fT   Pages    All    From     To            Paper Source   p Destination         l GANI   First from   Manual Feed      i Printer    Remaining from   Cassette 1          2 O File       IMPORTANT The paper source menus vary according to the paper sources of  your printer and paper sizes you choose in the Page Setup dialog box  For  paper loading instructions  see Chapter 9     When the selections are what you want  click Print  or Save  if the destination is not  a printer      To print the  document without  a cover page   click None     5  6    Printing a cover page automatically    You can choose to print a cover page that provides information about the  printed document  such as the document   s name an
186. move  appears  type the print server s name    and click Send     To send the changes to the printer  click Send     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users    67    Drag the slider to  change the printer s  subnet mask     The IP address and  subnet mask of hosts  that have access to  this printer appear  here   No more than  16 in the list      68   Chapter 2    Changing TCP IP configurations    You can specify the IP address of the printer  For information about  determining the printer   s IP address and setting up the printer on a TCP IP    network  see Chapter 4    Open the Communication Configuration category    You see a list of communication settings options   Open the TCP IP Configuration category    In the panel that appears  make the changes you want     LaserWriter 16 600 PS    Printer s IF Address     Printer    s Subnet Mask  255 0 0 0    Default Gateway Address   o oo00    Aecess List     IP Address Subnet Mask    ALL E   Add   2     _       Type the IP address here     IP address of the default  gateway used for sending  packets off the local network    To remove a host or network of hosts from the To add to the list  click Add   access list  click its name  then click Remove  For information about the dialog box that  appears  see the next page     When you click the Add button in the TCP IP Configuration panel  this dialog  box appears     ca Local     4 Individual    I Group    IF Address    Frinter s Subnet Mask   z255 0 0 0    COO  Net Subnet   Node  
187. n  and click the Resume button  You can also put the document that   s  currently printing on hold by dragging it to the list of documents waiting  to print     Macintosh Users   171      To indicate that a print request is urgent  select its title or icon  by clicking it    then choose Set Print Time from the Printing menu  In the dialog box that  opens  click Urgent  This moves the print request to the top of your list       To indicate that a print request should not print until a future time  select its title or  icon  by clicking it   then choose Set Print Time from the Printing menu   In the dialog box that opens  click At Time  then set the time you want       To change the order of the items waiting to print  move their place in the list by  dragging their titles up or down in the list       To sort the list of documents waiting to print  click the title of the column you  want to sort by  For example  to sort by the name of the document  click  Document Name   You can also sort by choosing the commands in the  View menu   The column title you sorted by is underlined  Sorting the  items does not change the order in which they will print  To see that order   sort by Print Time       To temporarily stop all documents from printing on this printer  choose Stop Print  Queue from the Printing menu  To resume using the printer  choose Start  Print Queue from the Printing menu  If youre using a PowerBook  this can  be a good way to save print requests while youre on the road
188. n 3 x 125    Configuring Sun OS version 4 1  Ultrix version 4 2   or other BSD systems 127    What to do next 128    Installing Options 129  Installing the optional 250 sheet feeder 130  Adjusting the side margin 135  Installing the 250 sheet universal cassette 136  Adding hard disks 137  Connecting a previously used hard disk 137  Connecting external hard disks 137  Adding an internal hard disk 140  Initializing hard disks 143  Using external hard disks from manufacturers other than Apple 144  Increasing the printer RAM 144  Installing RAM 145  Configuring your software for new printer options 150  Configuring the Macintosh printer software 150    Configuring the printer from an IBM PC or compatible 152    Part Il    Guide for Users    6 Macintosh Users 155    System requirements 156  Installing the printer software 156  More information about the Installer program 158    Selecting and setting up the printer 159    Creating  throwing away  and manipulating desktop printer icons 160  Determining the status of a printer by looking at its icon 160  Switching between printers 161   Drag the document you want to print to a desktop printer icon 161   Select the printer using its desktop printer icon 161   Select a new printer using the Chooser 162    Printing 162  Selecting page setup options 162  Printing documents 164  Printing a cover page automatically 165  Printing color and grayscale documents 166  Reporting printing errors 167  Turning tray switching on or off 168  Printing
189. n tells the  driver to report the dimensions of the paper as the printable area     Protocol Options Tells the print driver whether to begin and end print jobs  with Ctrl D  Default means it will begin and end jobs with a Ctrl D  and  None means it won t  If the printer is connected to your computer or  network by its parallel port  click Default  if it s connected by its Ethernet  port  click None     PostScript Performance Tells the driver to build PostScript document  descriptions that print as fast as possible when Optimize for Speed is  selected  Such document descriptions might not print successfully on  printers with limited memory  Select    Optimize for Portability    to tell the  driver to build PostScript document descriptions that print successfully on  many different printers     Windows and DOS Users    183    184    Chapter 7    Fonts    Click the Fonts tab to display the Fonts tab dialog box  Parameters in this  dialog box control the way the driver prints TrueType fonts used in your  documents  The driver can download available TrueType fonts as TrueType  fonts  Type 42   substitute available PostScript fonts for TrueType fonts  or  automatically create PostScript versions of TrueType fonts and download  them to the printer when you print     Apple Color Laser riter 12 600 on LPT1     Paper   Features    Fonts   PostScript   dob Control      Watermark    r 4pple Color Laser titer 12 600 on LPT 1     Send TrueType Fonts to This Printer as  ne  2    J   Substit
190. n the previous section  except that you select Custom Install   step 7  and click    Windows NT Printer Software     Make sure the other  checkboxes are deselected  then follow these steps     1 Click Install  Instructions for installing the Windows NT software appear   2 Click Continue  The Print Manager appears     3 Select Create Printer from the Print Manager   s Printer menu  The Create Printer dialog  box appears     4 Select Other  at the bottom of the list  in the Driver Combo box   5 Insert Printer Disk 3 for Windows in the floppy disk drive     6 Make sure the correct floppy disk drive is indicated in the Install Driver dialog box and  click OK  A list of printer drivers appears     7 Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer and click OK     8 Follow the instructions on the screen  and click Continue and OK to complete the  installation     Windows and DOS Users   177    178    Printing from Windows applications    After you have connected the printer to your computer and installed and set  up the printer software  youre ready to start printing  This section explains the  basic steps required to print a document  though the details can vary from one  program to another  To find out more about printing from your programs    read the documentation that came with them  If you have Windows NT  print  using the TCP IP protocol or using AppleTalk protocol  See your Windows NT  manual for information on configuring     To print a document from a Windows p
191. nces category   You see a list of preferences   Open the Startup Pages category     In the panel that appears  click the checkboxes to turn the startup page and  demonstration page on or off     An X in a checkbox means the printer is set to print the page     To send the setting to the printer  click Send     Conserving energy    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS automatically reduces its power  consumption after 60 minutes of inactivity  You can lengthen or shorten the  time that the printer remains idle before it reduces its power consumption   Once the printer turns down its power  it will need to warm up again before  printing the next document  Network users may experience a delay of up to 3  minutes in printing     Open the Printer Preferences category    You see a list of preferences    Open the Energy Saving Delay category    In the panel that appears  select a delay time from the list box     To send the setting to the printer  click Send     Setting paper handling options    When the printer runs out of paper in one tray  it can automatically switch  and use paper from the paper cassette or multipurpose tray  By using  automatic tray switching between the 250 sheet paper cassette and the 100   sheet multipurpose tray  you can print 350 sheets without reloading paper     You can also tell the printer what size paper is in the multipurpose tray  Then   if you print a job that uses a different size paper  the printer will not use this  tray     Open the Job Defaults cat
192. nd NetWare Users    83    84    Chapter 3    IMPORTANT The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS is a PostScript printer only  If  you are using NetWare 4 x  use PostScript banner pages only  If you use  another type of banner page  the banner will not print  Do not use banner  pages at all with NetWare 3 x  If you do  the banner will not print     Step 1  Choosing an operating mode    When setting up your printer for a NetWare network  you have a choice of  three operating modes     e PSERVER mode  in which the printer emulates NetWare   s PPERVER  software and functions as a dedicated print server        RPRINTER mode  in which the printer functions as a remote printer    a ATPS  AppleTalk Print Spooler  mode  in which the printer functions as a  remote AppleTalk printer    In PSERVER mode  the factory default  print jobs are stored in a queue on a  specified file server and retrieved by the printer     In RPRINTER mode  the printer depends on the NetWare print server  software   either a NetWare Loadable Module  NLM   an RPRINTER EXE  executable file  or a value added process  VAP  running on top of the  Operating system   to manage printing  Print jobs are stored in a queue on a  specified file server  When the printer is ready to print the job  the NetWare  print server software copies the job to the printer     In ATPS mode  the printer uses its AppleTalk protocol support to  communicate with the Novell ATPS NetWare Loadable Module  NLM   The  NLM  included in the NetWare for Mac
193. nd quitting the Apple Printer Utility 100  Selecting the printer 101   Viewing printer information 101   Giving the printer an AppleTalk name 101  Identifying the printers physical location 102  Printing font samples 102    Turning the startup pages on or off 102  Conserving energy 103  Setting paper handling options 103  Setting up job handling 104  Viewing the Ethernet address 104  Working with a NetWare network 105  Changing TCP IP configurations 106  Viewing and changing communication settings 107  Sending PostScript files to the printer 108  Restarting the printer 108   Banner pages and NetWare 109   Installed Type 1 fonts and Adobe Type Manager 109  Installing Type 1 fonts 109  Removing Type 1 fonts 110  Changing the size of the ATM font cache 110  Turning ATM off oron H0   What todo next 110    Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users 111  Before you begin 1I  Initial TCP IP setup 112  Will these instructions work for my flavor of UNIX  112  Background information 112  Security 112  Step 1  Installing the software the printer administrator needs 112  Step 2  Obtaining an IP address for the printer 113  Step 3  Assigning an IP address to the printer 113  Step 4  Making sure everything is working H7  What to do next 119    Contents   ix    Contents    Configuring the printer 119   Getting UNIX users started using the printer 119   Notes on configuring specific UNIX systems 121  Configuring HP UX version 8 07 121  Configuring HP UX version 9xx 123  Configuring IBM AIX versio
194. nd users  Who does what    The printer is usually set up and maintained by a printer administrator and  shared by a number of users  This book is organized accordingly  Part I  contains setup information for the printer administrator  and Part II contains  setup and usage information for users     Depending on the type of problem  troubleshooting can be  handled by the administrator or by users  The appendixes in Part III  contain additional information that administrators and users might need     Hint  When you set up the printer  be sure to hang the quick reference  booklet inside the printer   s door  That way users have easy access to helpful  problem solving information     xix    XX    Preface    What the printer administrator should know    The printer administrator sets up the hardware  installs any options  installs  the printer on the network  and helps new users get started  To accomplish  these tasks  printer administrators must      be familiar with the network connections and topology    a have access to and knowledge of the special tools required by their  networks     m for AppleTalk networks  no special tools required    m for Novell NetWare networks  administrative privileges and familiarity  with programs like PCONSOLE    a for TCP IP networks with UNIX   workstations  superuser privileges and  knowledge of their UNIX systems printing architecture    Getting new users started    In almost every case   regardless of the operating system   the printer  admini
195. net 30  31  34  transfer drum  clearing paper jams from 233 234  life expectancy of 260  transfer drum cleaning unit   removing replacing 311   316  transfer drum lever 12  18  233  296  Transmission Control Protocol Internet  Protocol  See TCP IP network  transparencies  loading into the multipurpose tray  25  207  210 211  printing  automatic vs  manual 204  Macintosh 164  169  Windows 181  186  types to use 210  261    tray switching  turning on or off    Macintosh 168  Windows 186    troubleshooting    background printing 243  247   banner pages  UNIX 251   blank areas  blotches  or spots on  printed pages 238 239  240   blurry or faded print 237  239  242   BOOTP or RARP server doesn   t  respond  UNIX 253   cable connections  Macintosh 246   can   t communicate with the  printer 244   can   t ping the printer by IP name or  IP address  UNIX 252   changing color density 254   Chooser problems  Macintosh  245 246   color print quality problems 241 242   document doesn   t print  Macintosh 48   document generates PostScript errors   UNIX 251      drop outs    appear on legal size  paper 242   external hard disk isn   t recognized   Macintosh 247   flakes of toner come off the printed  page 240   fonts questions and answers 288   290   hardware options don   t appear in Print  dialog box  Macintosh 247   horizontal bands appear on the printed  page 241   interpreting lights on the status panel  149  218 222  323 334   lines stairstep off the page  UNIX 251   network zone se
196. new separation discharger unit                                                                 6                                                    Replacing the Fuser   321    l Appendix F    7 Clean the density sensor              8 Close the top cover     9 Close the printer   s door                                         Appendix G  Diagnosing Problems for Service    This appendix shows how the status panel behaves when the printer is out of  paper  when there   s a paper jam  and when it   s time for routine maintenance     Occasionally the printer may have a serious problem that cannot be fixed with  routine maintenance procedures  When such a problem occurs  the printer  will stop working  and the lights on the status panel will blink in patterns that  are meaningful to trained service personnel  If you take time to notice which  lights are on and report this on the telephone to an Apple authorized service  provider  it will assist him or her in diagnosing and fixing the problem     323    324    Normal power on status panel behavior    Appendix G    Every time you turn on the printer  the lights on the status panel reflect the  results of diagnostic tests the printer performs on itself  When everything   s  normal  the four main lights are on at first  Then they go out  one by one  left  to right                          First  the  Ready In use light   O  goes out     Finally  the  Paper Jam light   84  goes out     Second  the Alert light Third  the Paper Out light
197. nsparencies  A4 Size  M3877G A    268 l Appendix A    Appendix B Setting Up the Printer  as an ATPS Remote Printer    Setting up your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer as a remote ATPS   AppleTalk Print Spooler  printer on a NetWare network requires minimal  configuration  most of the network printing capability is built into every  Macintosh computer  With the proper software and physical connections  a  Macintosh on a NetWare network can print to a NetWare managed printing  queue that can be selected from the Macintosh Chooser     IMPORTANT ATPS is a part of Novell   s NetWare for Macintosh NetWare  Loadable Module  NLM   which must be loaded and configured on your  NetWare server  The configurations described in this appendix can be  performed only after the Macintosh NLM has been installed     269    270    Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 4 server    Appendix B    If you are setting up the printer for access by Macintosh computers on a  NetWare 4 network and this is the first time you are configuring ATPS  follow  these instructions     You can configure ATPS from the server console or by running RCONSOLE   remote console  from a client PC     At the console prompt  type    load install   The Install utility starts  and a list of Installation Options appears   Select the Maintenance Selective Install option and press Enter    An additional list of options appears    Select Product Options from the list and press Enter     A list of product options appea
198. nt  check the steps you followed in Chapter 1 for  connecting and turning on the printer  Make sure that you have installed the  toner cartridges and loaded paper into the paper cassette  Check that no  packing material or paper has caused a jam in the printer     Also check that you have followed all the software installation steps presented  in this chapter     If the printer still wort print  indicator lights on the printer   s status panel  blink to signal different errors and printing conditions  Check the lights and  refer to Appendix G for their meaning  You can also check the status  messages that appear in the PrintMonitor  during background printing  to see  if error messages appear that might help you identify the problem     What to do next    You may change some of the printer   s default settings using the Apple Printer  Utility as explained in the next section  Then you can set up users    computers  as explained in    Getting Macintosh Users Started Using the Printer     later in  this chapter  If you want to install any hardware options  see Chapter 5     Changing printer settings with the Apple Printer Utility    Though the printer itself has no control panel  you can change some settings  on the printer by using programs on computers connected to it     a On Macintosh computers  use the Apple Printer Utility  described in this  chapter       On IBM PC and compatible computers  use the Apple Printer Utility for  Windows  described in Chapter 3     The Apple 
199. nter looks for paper  in any available paper   source  including the  multipurpose tray  when the paper size  matches      Setting paper handling options    When the standard paper cassette runs out of paper  the Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS can automatically switch and use paper from another paper source   such as the multipurpose tray  if you tell the printer that the tray contains the  same size paper   This lets you continue printing without reloading paper  If  you have the optional 250 sheet feeder  and it contains the same size paper   automatic tray switching includes it as a paper source  Combining all three  paper sources lets you print up to 600 sheets without reloading paper     Open the Job Defaults category   You see a list of job default categories   Open the Paper Handling category     In the panel that appears  click the checkbox to turn Automatic Tray Switching on or off     LaserWriter 12 600 P      Set Defaults Update Info      gt  Printer Information    gt  Printer Preferences      Job Defaults    7 _ Paper Handling   Choose the size of paper in    the multipurpose tray    If you print jobs that use a  P  Automatic Tray Switching n different size paper  the printer  perdete e or nrn en  lt    avoids the multipurpose tray         Use the pop up menu to choose a default paper size for the multipurpose tray     If you turn on the automatic tray switching feature  in step 3   the printer  draws paper from any paper source that holds the correct size paper   H
200. ntosh   changing the energy saving delay  60  249   configuring NetWare settings 66   67   configuring TCP IP settings 68   69   downloading fonts to the printer  55 56   downloading PostScript files to the  printer 72   identifying printer location 54   initializing a hard disk connected to  the printer 58  143   job handling configuration network  option 62   naming the printer 53   54   preventing print job interrupts 62   removing fonts 57   restarting the printer 72   setting AppleTalk network zone 64   setting error timeout 63   setting printer IP address 68   69  113   turning automatic tray switching on or  off 61   turning startup pages on or off 59   using the printer features window  51 53   using the Printer Selector window  51  52    viewing and changing communication  settings 70 71  viewing printer information 53  viewing the Ethernet address 65  Apple Print Monitor for Windows  79  81 83  175  AppleTalk  EtherTalk  network 29  30  AppleTalk network zone   See network zones  ATPS  AppleTalk Print Spooler   operating mode 84  270 275  automatic tray switching feature  Macintosh 61  Windows 103 104  automatic vs  manual printing 204  A UX UNIX implementation 112  119    B5 size paper 25  211 213  261  background printing 170 172  243  247  backup copies of printer disks 44  banner pages  NetWare and 84  93  109  251  UNIX and 251  Berkeley Software Distribution  BSD    UNIX 112  119  configuring BSD systems 127 128  binary format  sending Windows data in  182  18
201. nts  such as magnifying lenses   with this product increases the potential hazard to your eyes  For your safety  have this  equipment serviced only by an Apple authorized service provider     Your printer is a Class 1 laser product  The Class   label  located at the back of the printer   indicates that the printer meets minimum safety requirements  A service warning label is located  inside the printer     DANGER  frrieite ister reieten when oper  AFD CORECT EROS TO BEAM  APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1 AUTRI Daa  PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1 ATTENTION  RAYOASSEMENT LASER WRSBLE EN CAS COUVERTURE  APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1  EN60825 1991    CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  LASER KLASSE 1    APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT  LASER DE CLASSE 1    LASTE ARLE W TARO Di APTA   pe LERINGE AL FARDD   DUNDO 3E ABIE       TELLE AL   KATE    Class 1 label VARNING   CSTUG LASERSTKALENG H  N DENMA DEL AR OIPNAD  AARSEL  UEMA LAME srala  Dinu TA Anan    AVAT TACESA GUET ALT TEHA MAAC MAT THALE  agi TEEN    ADVARSEL  USYNLIG LASEESTA  LING H  R DOCHI   PNE  LL  ee  Fii g TLLEN  C00 ee     Fee Le  FeR Pees Een T       Service warning label    How Much of This Book Do   Have to Read     The manual contains all the information you need for the Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS printer  whether youre the printer administrator who sets it up or a  user who wants to print some transparencies for a meeting  This preface  directs you to specific chapters depending on what kind of network you have     Printer administrators a
202. nts folder  inside the System Folder  is one place to find fonts        Click a font  O Appleicon  then click Add  OQ Applelcontwo bmap   Or double click A a  asics Fonts  the font   CO Bookman    O Chicago    O Courier Hie Add All    D Delphian    Destination     AvantGarde Book a Fonts you add are gathered here until  vantbarde boo    AvantGarde Demi you click Send     a geet E   If you change your mind  you can select  Garamond LightNarrow   fonts and click Remove    Or click Remove All and start over      Betis          5 Use the Destination pop up menu to choose a destination for the fonts   You can send fonts to the printer s RAM   eS ee RAM  If you have installed an internal hard disk  its  SCSI ID is 0  zero   You can choose 0 and  send fonts to the internal hard disk   If you have an external hard disk connected  to the printer  you can choose its SCSI ID and  send fonts to the hard disk   Fonts you send to the printer   s RAM are lost whenever the printer is turned  off  whereas fonts sent to the printer   s hard disk are not lost when the printer  is turned off   6 Click Send     Chapter 2    Removing fonts    When you no longer need them  you can remove fonts from the printer   s    memory or a hard disk connected to the printer     1 Open the Printer Preferences category     You see a list of preferences     2 Open the Fonts category     3 Inthe Fonts panel that appears  select the fonts you want to remove     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Set Defaults     gt  Printer
203. o 810f  LaserWriter 16 600 PS  LaserWriter 16 600 PS Fax  LaserWriter 16 600 PSJ  LaserWriter 4 600 PS  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    You can optionally install the Windows PPD files for these Apple LaserWriter  printers     LaserWriter Select 360  LaserWriter Pro 600  LaserWriter Pro 630  LaserWriter 16 600 PS    RAM upgrade specifications    Ozone emission    To increase the printer   s RAM  purchase SIMMs with the following  specifications     SIMM dimensions      Length  10795 mm     0 20 mm  4 25 in      008     a Height  254 mm  10 in   maximum    SIMM sizes and speeds    Size Configuration Speed Connector type  1 MB SIMM 256 Kbit x 32 bit 60 ns or less 72 pin  8 MB SIMM 1 Mbit x 32 bit 60 ns or less 72 pin  16 MB SIMM 4 Mbit x 32 bit 60 ns or less 72 pin    Ozone gas is emitted by almost all laser printers and photocopiers  Because  ozone can be an irritant  various regulatory agencies have established limits  regarding the amount of ozone to which employees may be exposed     The current OSHA permissible limit for ozone is 0 1 parts of ozone per  million parts of air  ppm   The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer produces  quantities of ozone far below the current limit specified by OSHA     To minimize ozone exposure  install the LaserWriter in a well ventilated area   If there are other laser printers or photocopy machines in the same area   additional air circulation may be required  Do not place the LaserWriter in a  small  enclosed space that lacks adequate vent
204. ode  84  92   96  selecting the queue and port assigned  to the printer  Windows 176  setting up client computers for  network printing 98  setting up the PostScript printer  driver 98  verifying the printer installation 98  NetWare Loadable Module  NLM  269  NetWare Printer Connections dialog box   Windows 176  network performance  adding hard disks  and 137  network printing options  job handling  Macintosh 62  Windows 104  networks  See also NetWare   TCP IP network  connecting the printer to 29 33  having Macintosh users install printer  software from 74 75    Index    347    348    Index    network zones  Macintosh  selecting 150  151  159  setting 64  troubleshooting 246  Novell NetWare  See NetWare  number of copies to print  specifying  Macintosh 164  Windows 181    O    operating modes for NetWare  ATPS 84  270 275  PSERVER 84  87 91  95  RPRINTER 84  92   96  operation summary of the printer  258 259  optional 250 sheet feeder  See  sheet feeder  optional 250 sheet universal cassette   See universal cassette  ordering replacement supplies 268  orientation  selecting  Macintosh 163  Windows 180  out of paper 326  output trays 2  210  229  ozone and air filters  replacing 317   319  ozone emission specifications 265    P    packing the printer to move it 295 301  Page Setup dialog box  Macintosh  162 163  page setup options  selecting  Macintosh 162 163  Windows 180 181    paper  A4 size 25  205  211 213  261  B5 size 25  211 213  261  choosing stock 204  legal size 2
205. of the printer 261  size guide on universal cassette 213  slots on controller board for inserting  SIMMs 145  148  software requirements  Macintosh 44  156  NetWare 77  Windows DOS 77  173  Space requirements of the printer 262    Index   353    354    Index    specifications  acoustic noise 262  controller 258  environmental 262  laser 257  life expectancy of components 260  marking engine 257  ozone emissions 265  paper 260 261  power consumption 263  print resolution 259  RAM  SIMM  upgrades 265  wait time 262  speed of printer 260  spool directory in UNIX  privileges for  118  121  spots or blotches on printed pages 238  stains on a printed page 240  standard paper cassette  avoiding paper jams 208  capacity of 25  26  205  261  clearing paper jams 229  232  236  illustration 2  205  loading 25 28  205  unpacking 7  using transparencies 204  using with multipurpose tray for same  print job 207  Startup pages  checking 38  150  turning on or off  Macintosh 59  Windows 102  static discharge  preventing 141  145  status of printer  determining 160  status panel lights  Alert 39  218 222  324  328 332  diagnosing problems from 323 334  faulty SIMM 149  333  fuser 222  303  332  illustration 39  low fuser oil 219  329  low toner 218  328  Paper Jam 39  228  324  327    Paper Jam Paper Out flash together  325  333 334  Paper Out 39  324  326  photoconductor cartridge 221  331  Ready In Use 39  324  toner carousel problem 334  toner disposal box 220  330  styled fonts 287  subne
206. ograms let the user decide which fonts  should appear in the Fonts menu  Check the manuals that came with your  programs     Why can   t   see my Monaco 9  Geneva 9 and 12  and Chicago 12 bitmapped fonts     These fonts are used by your Macintosh to display information correctly   Because the Macintosh needs these fonts  the Finder makes them invisible to  prevent users from removing them     What does the term Apple classic fonts mean     The Apple classic fonts are the original ten bitmapped fonts that came with  the first Macintosh in 1984  These fonts  which all have city names  include  Athens  Cairo  a picture font   Chicago  Geneva  London  Los Angeles   Monaco  New York  San Francisco  and Venice  Several of the fonts  Athens   Cairo  London  and San Francisco  came in only one size   18 points     This is a sample of Athens     HOw aw l wlOlFos    This is a sample of Chicago   This is a sample of Geneva     This is a sample of London   This is   sample af Los Angeles    This is a sample of Monaco    This is a sample of New York     Thid i   a dample of San Franciico     This is a sample of Venice     Chicago  Geneva  Monaco  and New York are currently available in TrueType  versions  The other classic fonts are still only available in bitmapped versions     Why do   sometimes get Geneva or Courier in my printed documents when   have  specified other fonts     Geneva often appears when youre trying to use a TrueType font but don t  have enough memory for scaling to op
207. oks  inside the printer s door   Be sure to let  other users know it s there      Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    9    Installing the fuser oil bottle  1 Take the bottle of fuser oil out of the printer setup kit     2 To remove the seal from the bottle  pull the orange tab      a            3 Open the cover of the fuser oil compartment     Open the cover                                                                             10   Chapter 1    4 Install the oil bottle     Gently tip the bottle upside down Press the bottle down   This opens the  and slide it into the compartment  mechanism in the lid so the oil can  flow into the compartment                                                                                    IMPORTANT If any fuser oil spills on the floor  clean it up immediately with  paper towels  The oil is very slippery     5 Close the cover over the fuser oil bottle     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   11    12    Installing the photoconductor cartridge and toner disposal box    Chapter 1    The photoconductor is a photosensitive device that captures an image in toner  and transfers it to the paper  The toner disposal box is where the printer  deposits any excess toner powder  You ll find a photoconductor cartridge and  two toner disposal boxes in the printer setup kit     IMPORTANT The photoconductor is sensitive to light  Do not open the package  until you are ready to install the photoconductor cartridge  Inside the foil bag  
208. ollow the  instructions in this appendix to replace the fuser yourself  Or you may prefer  to contact an Apple authorized service provider to replace the fuser for you     Fuser             Alert light Fuser access door    Note  When you replace the fuser  you also replace the air filter  ozone  filter  the separation discharger unit  and the transfer drum cleaning unit   All these items are included in the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS Fuser  Replacement Kit     303    304    Replacing the fuser    Appendix F    1    Turn off the printer and unplug it   IMPORTANT Wait 10 15 minutes to let the fuser cool down     Open the printer   s door     Remove the fuser oil bottle and put it  upright  in a safe place     IMPORTANT The fuser oil is very slippery  If it spills on the floor  use paper  towels or other absorbent material to clean it up immediately     If necessary  close the face up delivery tray     Open the door to the paper pickup area          V       AZ             i  AS  R       A  A                 AE  A             6    yA  EE    Open the fuser access door     6    Replacing the Fuser          T                                              Pull the top of the tab loose  Then slide the rest up and pull it out     Remove the tab that connects the fuser door strap to the printer     7    Remove the fuser access door     8    A           C7    anc             IK             With a large flat screwdriver  loosen the locking screws     9          j    The screws do not come
209. ompletely out                      Don t pull the paper too hard   If the paper tears  it is more  difficult to remove              Remove the jammed paper     If the paper is hard to see or reach  you can open the guide cover for easier  access     Open the guide cover     Press the release lever   Don t pull the paper too hard   If the paper tears  it is more  difficult to remove                              Close the fuser access door and resume printing     Clearing Paper Jams   235    Clearing paper from the optional feeder    The optional 250 sheet feeder has its own paper pickup area where paper  may get jammed              The paper jam is in the paper pickup  area on the optional 250 sheet feeder                                                     If you can t find the paper jam  close the access door and open the paper  cassette   Paper might get caught just as it   s leaving the paper cassette   Slide  the paper cassette out of the printer  Inspect the stack of paper  and remove  any paper that is misaligned     236   Chapter 11    Fixing Image Problems    This chapter suggests ways you can improve the quality of images printed on  your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS     a The first section describes general problems with print quality         The second section deals with problems printing in color     General print quality problems    Print is faded     If areas of your printed page are too light or colors are missing  try these  Steps     Redistribute toner in the 
210. onts     When you manually download a Type 1 font to a hard disk attached to the  printer  the font is available to the printer and no longer has to be  downloaded  This can speed up printing     In addition to downloading fonts  you can also use the Font Downloader to  perform various printer management tasks  such as listing and removing  downloaded fonts  manually downloading PostScript language files  clearing  the printer font cache  and resynchronizing your printer with the Windows  driver     See your network administrator for more information about performing these  tasks on your network  or choose the Help button in the Font Downloader  dialog box to see instructions for these tasks     Downloading fonts manually to RAM or to the hard disk    Fonts need to be downloaded only once  Users who want to use fonts that  have already been downloaded should use the Job Control tab dialog box   described later in this chapter  to turn on Do Not Download Fonts   Otherwise  the fonts will be downloaded again  wasting time and system  resources     Before you begin If you are downloading fonts to a hard disk  you must add the  hard disk to the device list  and initialize it if necessary   as explained later in  this chapter     From the Program Manager  open the Control Panel   Double click the Printers icon     The Printers dialog box appears     Windows and DOS Users   191    192    Chapter 7    If it is not already selected  select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS from the Ins
211. oo tight     Loading letterhead paper in the multipurpose tray    You can load a stack of letterhead in the multipurpose tray for automatic  printing  You can also print letterhead manually by feeding one sheet at a  time     This illustration shows how to load a stack of letterhead in the multipurpose  tray        Place letterhead paper  face down in the tray  with  the top of the paper    in      closest to the printer                            Slide the width guides so  they rest against the paper           If the paper bows out even    Loading Paper    Slightly  the guides are too tight     209    210    Chapter 9    Loading transparencies in the multipurpose tray    You can load one transparency at a time into the multipurpose tray for  manual printing  or you can place a stack of about 50 transparencies in the  tray for automatic feed     IMPORTANT When you print overhead transparencies  use the multipurpose  tray   This helps avoid paper jams   Use only Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  Transparencies Letter or Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS Transparencies A4  with this printer   See Appendix A for information about ordering these  products   The printer may not print on other types of transparencies  and  quality will suffer  Use the face down tray  on top of the printer  for  delivering printed transparencies  If you use the face up tray  be sure to  remove each printed transparency from the face up tray before you print  another one        To make sure the edges are  align
212. ool_directory  chmod 775 path_to_this_queues_spool_directory  Try printing by using this command     lpr  Pprinter_queue_name filename    Note that there   s no space between  P and printer_queue_name     The printer is now set up on your TCP IP network  If you want to install any  options  see Chapter 5        Installing Options    The Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS has several user installable printer  options  You can add a 250 sheet feeder  containing a universal cassette   a  250 sheet universal cassette  and external hard disks or an internal hard disk    for font management  You can also increase the printer   s random access  memory  RAM      This chapter provides instructions for installing these options     WARNING When installing any of the options described in this chapter   be sure the printer is turned off     129    130    Installing the optional 250 sheet feeder    Chapter 5    Follow these instructions for installing the 250 sheet feeder  For instructions  on loading the feeder with paper  see    Loading the Optional 250 Sheet  Universal Cassette    in Chapter 9     WARNING To install the 250 sheet feeder  you must place the Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS on top of the cassette base  Because of the  printers weight  its recommended that you have two people lift the  printer  Aligning the printer on the 250 sheet feeder base is easier when  two people are lifting the printer     The cassette base adds approximately 4 inches to the height of the Color  LaserWriter 1
213. or UNIX Users   117    118    Chapter 4    Example  AppleLWTest    LaserWriter_12_600_PS      lp  mx 0 rm LaserWriterFloor 2      rp AppleLWTest      sd  usr spool lpd AppleLwTest      lf  usr spool lpd printerlog  Note  For a description of some of the parameters in this printcap entry   see    Getting UNIX Users Started Using the Printer     later in this chapter     Create and set the privileges for the spool directory specified in step 2     Example    mkdir  usr spool lpd AppleLWwTest   chown daemon  usr spool lpd AppleLWTest  chgrp daemon  usr spool lpd AppleLWTest  chmod 775  usr spool lpd AppleLWTest    Printing a test page  Use any PostScript file as a test page     Most UNIX systems use either the lpr or 1p command to print  documents over a TCP IP network  The following commands show examples  of how to print a file named file postscript to the printer     Example  lpr  PAppleLWTest file postscript  If everything is working  the Ready In Use light on the printer  leftmost of the    indicator lights  will blink  then the pages will print  If there   s a problem  see  Chapter 13 for troubleshooting tips     Cleaning up the printcap file after testing the printer    You may want to delete the test entry you made in your  etc printcap  file and instead create a new one as described in    Getting UNIX Users  Started Using the Printer     later in this chapter     What to do next    You may configure the printer as explained in the next major section  After  the printer 
214. orSync defines the colors a monitor  printer  scanner  or digital camera can  reproduce in a ColorSync profile  ColorSync profiles are compatible with the  profile specifications of the International Color Consortium  ICC      Next  ColorSync converts device specific colors into standard colors  The CIE  color standard describes colors in terms of how they are perceived by the  human eye under standardized lighting conditions   CIE stands for the  Commission International de      Eclairage  the International Commission on  Illumination  which founded the standard in 1931      To maintain consistency  ColorSync previews a device s color capabilities  in  the ColorSync profile  and   where necessary   converts standard colors to  closely matching colors that the device can reproduce  For example  your  monitor may be able to display a vivid red  but your printer inks may not be  able to produce that color  ColorSync determines the    next best    color for  your printer to use     Using ColorSync    The ColorSync profile for a device is automatically installed as part of the  device   s software  To get the best visual color matching on your system  make  sure the following monitor settings are selected     m For the best color match when printing  select the    page white    or    D50     system profile for your type of monitor in the ColorSync System Profile  control panel       For the best visual match between the colors on your monitor and printed  colors  select the Page 
215. ory Configuration  Standard 12MB             Cassette  Optional   Not Installed    Print Quality Mode  Normal  Fastest Print Speed        Paper Type  Tray Switch                  Help Cancel     OK      The Features tab dialog box lets you configure the printer to use the following  options       Memory Configuration The amount of RAM installed in the printer       Cassette Indicates whether you have installed the optional 250 sheet  feeder       Tray Switch Turns tray switching on or off     Paper Type Plain or Transparency     a Print Quality Mode Normal  fastest print speed  or Best  slower print speed      Job Control    Click the Job Control tab to display the Job Control tab dialog box  which  controls such options as when the PostScript header and the PostScript error  handler are sent to your printer     Apple Color Laser riter 12 600 on LPT1        Baper   Eestwes   Fonts    PostSoit J dob Control   watemark            Printer Mode     Error Handler   lt  gt  ASCII Mode   amp  Bihar Mode        Send Error Handler With Each Job             r  Font Control       PostScript Header    Q Download Each Job Download         Do Not Download Fonts    4 Already Downloaded                     Help     Cancel     OK    The following list describes the printer settings in the Job Control tab  dialog box       Printer Mode By default  the printer is set up to receive data in either binary  or ASCII format  There is no need to switch between these manually       PostScript Header T
216. ou  can see an example of the differences among television sets at a consumer  electronics store      291    292    About ColorSync    ColorSync is a system extension that provides color conversion capabilities  and improves color consistency  ColorSync    translates    the colors used on one  device so that they match the colors displayed or printed on another device     ColorSync color conversion is a central part of Macintosh computing   ensuring that programs  monitors  printers  scanners  and digital cameras use  the same scheme for color conversion  This means you can scan an image   display it on your monitor  and print it   with visually matching colors every  step of the way     How ColorSync works    Appendix D    ColorSync does not convert colors directly from one device to another   Instead  ColorSync takes information about each device   s color capabilities  and compares it to an independent color standard  In this way  it converts the  colors produced on one device to closely matching colors that can be  reproduced on another device                    Monitor ColorSync profile CIE color standard ColorSync profile Printer  k k   o   css so BB   1 ColorSync checks 2 ColorSync translates 3 If a device can t  a device   s ColorSync device specific colors reproduce a standard   profile for the device s to standard colors  which color  ColorSync  color capabilities  are not limited by chooses the device s   the color capabilities closest match   of any device     Col
217. ou want to print to a desktop printer icon  and that  printer automatically becomes the default printer     m Select the desktop printer icon and choose Set Default Printer from the  Printing menu       Select a new printer using the Chooser     Note  Switching between printers may change how much information you  can fit on a page  It   s best to choose a printer before you spend much time  paginating the document     Drag the document you want to print to a desktop printer icon    You can switch to a new default printer by dragging the icon of any document  you want to print to the icon of the printer you want to use     Select the printer using its desktop printer icon    If you already have a desktop printer icon for the printer you want to use   follow these steps to select a new default printer without immediately printing  anything on it     1 Click the icon of the desktop printer you want to use   A Printing menu appears on the menu bar at the top of the screen   2 Choose the Set Default Printer command from the Printing menu     Until you choose another printer  the Print command will send your  documents to this printer     Macintosh Users   161    162    Printing    Chapter 6    Select a new printer using the Chooser    If you dont have a desktop printer icon for the printer you want to use  you  must select the printer using the Chooser  The Chooser will then create a  desktop printer icon for the printer that you select and make it the default  printer     Choose
218. owever  the printer is not able to detect the size of paper you may have  placed in the multipurpose tray  so you must tell it  If the paper size for the  multipurpose tray is the same as the paper in the standard paper cassette  and  automatic tray switching is turned on   the printer automatically uses the  multipurpose tray as a paper source     To send the paper handling settings to the printer  click Send     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   61    An X in a checkbox  means the printer  prints all pages ina  job before closing  the connection   with the computer  that requested   the print job     4    62   Chapter 2    Setting up job handling    You can set job handling for individual network protocols that you use  If you  need to shut down the printer in the middle of printing a document  you can  use this panel to make sure the printer finishes the job before closing the  connection     Open the Job Defaults category   You see a list of network options   Open the Job Handling Configuration category     Click the checkboxes next to the network types to specify when the connection with the  computer should be broken     With this feature on  the printer keeps the connection open until the last page  of a job has printed  That way  if a problem develops at the end of the print  job  the printer can send error messages to alert users to the problem  Turning  the feature on does make the total print time for the job somewhat longer  and  the printer prints jobs
219. ox appears  prompting you to enter a priority number for  the queue     Type a priority number between 1 and 10 in the provided field and press Enter     PCONSOLE identifies the file server  the queue associated with the print  server  and the queue   s priority number     Press Esc until PCONSOLE prompts you to press Enter to quit  then press Enter     You must now reload the PSERVER software  if it previously existed  from  the file server console so that the updated configuration is available to the  network   If no PSERVER software was previously loaded  skip to step 9     At the server prompt  type unload pserver print_server and press Enter     Example    unload pserver PS_486    Now that the PSERVER software is unloaded  you can reload it with the new  settings     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   95    96    Chapter 3    Type load pserver print_server and press Enter     Example    load pserver PS_486   Restart the printer  by turning it off and on or using the Apple Printer Utility    Next  you ll use the Apple Printer Utility to complete the configuration   Completing the RPRINTER configuration with the Apple Printer Utility   Start Windows  if it   s not already running     In the Program Manager window  open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group  and double click the Apple Printer Utility icon     Click Network    Click the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer you want  then click Open Printer   Select Communication Configuration    Sel
220. path ae mae         apes a Background Printing   __ Finally  click Setup   eral    Or double click the printer    Second Floor    AppleTalk Zones     HE Acti  Third Floor   AppleTalk a name   a shortcut         The Chooser identifies the type of printer and automatically sets up the  printer software  A small printer icon appears beside the printer name     After you close the Chooser  an icon representing the printer appears on the  desktop  If you want  you can repeat step 2  selecting and setting up other  printers so all their icons appear on your desktop for easy access     Close the Chooser     Anyone who wants to use the printer must follow this procedure at least once     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   47    48    Chapter 2    Step 3  Making sure everything is working    The best way to make sure everything is set up correctly is to print something   As a simple test  open and print the Read Me file that is in the Apple  LaserWriter Software folder     Locate the Read Me file in the Apple LaserWriter Software folder     Click the Read Me file to select it  and choose Print from the File menu  or drag the Read  Me file to the desktop printer icon and drop it on the printer      The Print dialog box appears listing the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer  as the selected printer  If the printer   s name does not appear in the dialog box   see    Step 2  Choosing the Printer on the Administrators Computer        Click Print     If the document doesn   t pri
221. pe font  This table is used only when you select the     Substitute PostScript Fonts for TrueType Fonts on This Printer    option     a For This TrueType Font Shows a list of all the TrueType fonts installed on  your system       Substitute This Font Lets you select how font substitution is done  Shows a  list of the PostScript fonts that are substituted for the TrueType fonts  Each  list box lists all the PostScript fonts available to the printer  PostScript  fonts available to the printer include all the fonts resident in the printer   s  ROM  as well as all the Type 1 fonts that you have downloaded to the  printers RAM or hard disks  Each list box also contains a Send As Type 1  option  which converts the TrueType font to a Type 1 font  The Use  Defaults button restores the original PostScript font substitutions     IMPORTANT For information about using Font Downloader  see    Downloading  Fonts     later in this chapter     Windows and DOS Users   185    186    Chapter 7       Features    Click the Features tab to display the Features tab dialog box  which lets you  configure the printer software to use optional printing features that you install  on the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  Use this dialog box to set up any  optional features you may purchase  such as additional memory or the 250   sheet feeder     Apple Color Laser riter 12 600 on LPT1       Paper   Features   Fonts   PostScript   Job Control i   watermark    r Printer Features             Feature Selection  Mem
222. pe fonts installed  This maintains consistency with  documents created on Macintosh systems that don t have TrueType fonts     Courier     23 items       If both a TrueType and bitmapped version of the same font are available  the  Macintosh uses the bitmapped font  providing that the stipulated point size is  present   If you want the Macintosh to use the TrueType font  you need to  remove the bitmapped font from your system     Using Fonts With the Printer   281    282    Appendix C    For example  if a document uses 12 point Times  available in that size as a  bitmapped font and as a TrueType font  the system uses the bitmapped font  If  a document uses 4 point Times  the system scales the TrueType font to that  size  because a bitmapped version isnt available     Using only TrueType fonts produces a closer match between the appearance  of type on the screen and on paper  However  a document you ve already  created with bitmapped fonts will be reformatted with the corresponding  TrueType fonts  and line breaks in the document may change  Similarly  if a  document is created on a system that has TrueType fonts or Adobe Type  Manager software installed  it may have different spacing  kerning  and so on   when opened on a system that doesnt have TrueType fonts or Adobe Type  Manager software     Keeping two font versions available    If you have a TrueType version of a font  you don t need a bitmapped version   However  although keeping both versions of a font takes up more d
223. pear in the box labeled    Target  Directory for Font Metrics Files        6 Select the fonts you want to add and click Add  Click Exit when you are done     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   109    110    What to do next    Chapter 3    Removing Type 1 fonts  In the ATM control panel  select the fonts to be removed     Click Remove     Changing the size of the ATM font cache    The size of the ATM font cache determines how much system memory is  available to store font information  The default setting is 256K  If you are  using many typefaces or sizes  you may want to increase the font cache size to  improve performance  To do this     Open the ATM control panel     Click the up arrow in the Font Cache box to increase the size  or click the down arrow to  decrease the size     Turning ATM off or on    ATM is turned on automatically when installed  When it is on  your screen  display uses Type 1 fonts  When it is off  your display uses TrueType fonts   However  Type 1 fonts print correctly whether or not ATM is on     To turn ATM on or off  open the ATM control panel and select On or Off   Then click Exit  Then restart Windows  as prompted  for the change to take  effect     The printer is now set up for Windows and DOS computers  If you want to  install any options  see Chapter 5  To learn how to print from Windows or  DOS computers  see Chapter 7  To set up the printer for UNIX users  see  Chapter 4     setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users    This chap
224. placing the air and ozone filters  317 319  replacing the fuser 303 311  replacing the separation discharger  unit 320 321  replacing the transfer drum cleaning  unit 311 316  routine procedures 218   226  Maintenance lights 39  manual vs  automatic printing 204  margin dial on optional sheet feeder 135  margins  adjusting the left margin setting for  the optional sheet feeder 135  for printable area  Windows 183  marking engine specifications 257  memory requirements  See also RAM  IBM PC or compatible 77  173  Macintosh 44  156     out of memory    message   Macintosh 247  printer 144 146  misaligned paper  See paper jams  moving desktop printer icons 160  moving the printer  preparations for  295 301  multipurpose tray  access door 2  206   209  211  capacity of 25  207  261  loading 207 211  opening 206  paper jams and 229  printer won   t draw paper from 251  switching to automatically  Macintosh 61  Windows 103 104  using transparencies 207  210 211  using with paper cassette for same  print job 207    N    naming desktop printer icons 160  naming the printer  Macintosh 53 54  246  PCONSOLE 88  Windows 101  NetWare  ATPS operating mode 84  269 275  banner pages and 84  93  109  251  configuring settings  Macintosh 66   67  Windows 105  connecting the printer to 29  30  initial setup  Windows 83 98  mapping to a print queue from  DOS 199  PCONSOLE utility 86   97  problems printing spreadsheets or  graphics 251  PSERVER operating mode  84  95  97 91  RPRINTER operating m
225. press Enter    A configuration window for the selected printer appears    If necessary  type an unassigned printer number for your printer and press Enter    A Configuration window appears for the selected printer    Press the down arrow key to move to the    Printer type    field and press Enter    A menu of printer types appears    From the list of printer types  select Other Unknown and press Enter   Other Unknown now appears in the Type field of the Configuration window   Press the down arrow key to move to the    Banner type    field and press Enter     From the list of Available Banner Types  select Postscript and press Enter     IMPORTANT If you are running PCONSOLE under NetWare 3 x  you must  disable banners  or the print job will not print  See    Banner Pages and  NetWare     near the end of this chapter     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   93    94    Chapter 3    15    16    17    Press Esc once to save the configuration    PCONSOLE asks you to confirm the new configuration    Select Yes and press Enter to confirm the changes    The newly defined printer now appears in the list of configured printers   Press Esc until you return to the Print Servers menu     Now that the print server is specified  you need to create a print queue to  associate with the print server     Creating a print queue   In the Available Options menu of PCONSOLE  select Print Queues and press Enter   The Print Queues window appears  listing the names of existing print 
226. printer   you can use any one of the following methods  which are described more   fully in the sections that follow     a Ping assignment Any printer administrator with superuser privileges can  use this method  which is sometimes called    gleaning     If your network has  neither BOOTP nor RARP services  and you have no access to Windows or  Macintosh computers  you must use this method       Macintosh Apple Printer Utility and Apple Printer Utility for Windows If your  network includes a Macintosh computer or Windows computer  you can  use one of these utility programs to set the printer   s IP address       BOOTP  Bootstrap Protocol  If your network has a BOOTP server  you can  use this method       RARP  Remote Address Resolution Protocol  If your network has a RARP  server  you can use this method     These methods are described in the next three sections  Choose which section  applies to you  and skip the others     Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users   113    114    Chapter 4    Printer IP address assignment  option A  Using ping assignment    Any printer administrator with superuser privileges can use the ping  assignment method to assign the printer   s IP address and store it in the  printer   s nonvolatile memory  so it remembers the address even when the  printer is turned off      Note  This method works only when the printer has no IP address  If you ve  already set the printer   s IP address  you cannot change it by using this  method     Turn on the printe
227. printer  bitmapped and TrueType  However   your system can use PostScript fonts as well when it has the proper  software installed     277    278    Appendix C    Bitmapped fonts    Bitmapped fonts consist of    pictures    of a typeface at specific sizes  For  example  you might have bitmapped fonts at 10   12   and 18 point sizes  installed in your Macintosh computer  For best results you need a separate  font file for each size of character you want to use     The icon of a bitmapped font  also called a fixed size font or screen font  has  the single letter A on it  The font   s point size appears at the end of its name     A  Monaco 12    When you request a bitmapped character  your Macintosh looks for an  installed bitmapped font in the size you specified   See    How the Macintosh  Looks for Fonts     later in this appendix   If it can   t find that font  your  Macintosh tries to construct one by scaling a size that it does find     In most cases  scaled bitmapped fonts don   t look nearly as good as  preinstalled ones  Such scaling is one reason for the jagged edges  sometimes  called    jaggies        yov ll see on your screen or in a printed document when you  request an uninstalled size  for example  I7 point Geneva      Bitmapped fonts are designed on grids of 72 dots per inch  dpi    the  standard Macintosh screen resolution  Because of their correspondence to the  standard screen resolution  bitmapped fonts in preinstalled sizes always look  great on your display
228. pt     Setting up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer   273    274    Modifying an existing ATPS configuration on a NetWare 3 x server    Appendix B    The procedure for modifying an existing ATPS configuration is similar to the  procedure for creating a new configuration  The primary difference 1s that  you are modifying an existing AUTOEXEC NCF file instead of creating a  new one     At the console prompt  type    load install  The Install utility starts  and a list of Installation Options appears   Select Product Options from the list and press Enter     A list of product options appears  If the Macintosh NLM is installed and  operating properly  a NW MAC option will be available     Select the NW MAC option and press Enter    A list of configuration files appears    From the list  select the file SYS  SYSTEM ATPS CFG and press Enter   A prompt appears  asking if you want to create a new file   Type y and press Enter     An empty window appears  providing an area for entering configuration  information     10    11    Enter a line of configuration information for each Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer    Enclose the printer name and zone name in quotation marks      Example       Sales Printer Ethernet Zone       This example identifies the printer    Sales Printer    located in the zone     Ethernet Zone        You can include a  h option at the end of the line to instruct ATPS to make  the printer unavailable for direct Macintosh printing  this makes the printer  acc
229. pter 5    6    Adjusting the side margin    Once you ve installed the optional sheet feeder  you can check its left margin  setting  If necessary  you can adjust the setting so that the left margins match  on pages printed from both paper cassettes     Turn on the printer    Load paper into the universal paper cassette in the feeder    For instructions  see Chapter 9    Print anything that you   ve already printed from the standard cassette  for comparison    In the Print dialog box  choose Lower Cassette from the Paper Source pop up menu   Compare the left margins on the pages printed from the different paper cassettes     If the margins are the same  no adjustment is necessary  If the margins don t  match  change the adjustment on the optional feeder  To increase the margin   turn the adjustment dial to a higher number  To decrease the margin  turn the  dial to a lower number         The margin dial is located on the side  of the optional sheet feeder        WN          WN       AAA             Repeat steps 3 5 until the margin is what you want on pages printed from the optional  feeder     Installing Options    135    Installing the 250 sheet universal cassette  To install the 250 sheet universal cassette in the printer  follow these steps     1 Unpack the cassette and remove any packing materials within the cassette        2 Slide the standard paper cassette out of the printer     3 Slide the 250 sheet universal cassette into the printer                                   
230. queues   Press Ins to create a new print queue    At the prompt  type a new queue name and press Enter    The new print queue now appears in the list    With the new queue name selected  press Enter    The Print Queue Information menu appears    In the Print Queue Information menu  select Print Servers and press Enter    A list of queue servers appears    Press Ins to view a list of queue server candidates     Select the name of the logical print server that was specified earlier     Specifying a Print  Server     and press Enter     The name of the server now appears in the Print Servers list   Press Esc until you return to the Available Options menu     Now that the print queue exists  you must associate it with the print server  you specified earlier     Associating a print server with the print queue    After you ve created a new print queue  you need to associate the print server  with the queue     In the Available Options menu of PCONSOLE  select Printers and press Enter     The Print Servers menu appears  displaying the names of existing print  servers     Select the printer you defined earlier and press Enter   A window appears  showing the printer configuration   Select Print Queues Assigned and press Enter     The NetWare Server Print Queue appears  It should list the printer number  you specified in an earlier procedure     Press Ins to view a list of available queues   Select the queue you created in the earlier procedure and press Enter     The Priority dialog b
231. r a line of configuration information for each Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printer    Enclose the printer name and zone in quotation marks      Example       Sales Printer Ethernet Zone       This example identifies the printer    Sales Printer    located in the zone     Ethernet Zone        You can include a  h option at the end of the line to instruct ATPS to make  the printer unavailable for direct Macintosh printing  that is  the printer will  be accessible only through ATPS queues     Example     Sales Printer Ethernet Zone     h    Note  Other ATPS options are available for configuring the printer  See  Novell   s NetWare for Macintosh documentation for more information on these  options     Press Esc to quit editing    A prompt appears  asking 1f you want to save your changes   Type y and press Enter    The list of configuration files reappears    Select the SYS  SYSTEM AUTOEXEC NCF file and press Enter    A window appears  displaying the files contents     Insert the following line after the load afp statement     load atps    This command instructs the NetWare server to automatically load the ATPS  service at startup time     Press Esc to exit the editor  then type y and press Enter to confirm the changes   Press Esc three times to exit the Install utility   At the system console prompt  type load atps and press Enter     The service is loaded and immediately becomes available to network users  A  message appears confirming the load  and the console displays its prom
232. r and save the startup page that prints out    Loginas root to any UNIX workstation on the same subnet as the printer   Add the following line to the  etc hosts table on your workstation   printer_IP_address _ printer_IP_name    You obtain the printer IP address from your network administrator  You  choose the printer IP name yourself  if it was not assigned by the network  administrator   It must follow the naming convention of your system  which  generally means it must contain fewer than 32 characters     Example   S0s2020  0 LaserWriterFloor2   Type the following command to force an entry into your system   s arp table   arp  s printer_IP_name _ printer_Ethernet_address    The printer IP name is the same name you used in step 3  You obtain the  Ethernet address from the startup page that prints automatically when you  turn on the printer  The address appears next to the top icon on the page     Example    If your startup page showed that your Ethernet address was  08 00 07 2b 48 fb  you would type    arp  s LaserWriterFloor2 08 00 07 2b 48 fb    Type the following ping command to store the Printer IP Address in the printer   s  memory     ping printer_IP_name  The printer IP name is the same name you used in steps 3 and 4     Example  ping LaserWriterFloor2    The ping command results in a message telling you the printer is alive on  the network     The address is now stored in the printer   s memory  and youre ready to test  whether the printer 1s working     To test the
233. r cartridge and toner disposal box 12    Installing the toner cartridges 19    Contents    Wait to install the printer options 24   Loading paper into the paper cassette 25   Connecting the printer 29  Connecting to an Ethernet network 30  Connecting to a LocalTalk network 32  Connecting directly to a single Macintosh 34  Connecting to an IBM PC or compatible with a parallel cable 35   Connecting the power and turning on the printer 37  Saving energy 39   Adjusting communication settings 40  Why customize communication settings  41  How to customize communication settings 41  How to return to the default settings 42   What to do next 42    Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users 43   Before you begin 44   Initial AppleTalk setup 44  Step 1  Installing the software the printer administrator needs 45  Step 2  Choosing the printer on the administrators computer 47  Step 3  Making sure everything is working 48  What to do next 48   Changing printer settings with the Apple Printer Utility 49  Opening the Apple Printer Utility 51  Viewing printer information 53  Naming the printer 53  Identifying the printers physical location 54  Sending fonts to the printer 55    Removing fonts 57  Printing font samples 57  Initializing a hard disk connected to the printer 58  Turning the startup pages on or off 59  Conserving energy 60  Setting paper handling options 6l  Setting up job handling 62  Setting the printer   s error timeout 63  Setting the printers network zones 64  Viewing the Et
234. r dealer  diagnosing problems from lights on  status panel 323  hardware failures 325  installing additional RAM 144  149  installing an internal hard disk 140  interference with television or radio  reception xvii  print quality problems 239  240  purchasing terminators 138  replacing the fuser 215  218  303  system software upgrades  44 45  157  245    Apple classic fonts 289   Apple LaserWriter Software folder   Macintosh 48  49  51   Apple LaserWriter Software program    group  Windows 79  82  99  175    Apple Printer Utility for Windows     See also IBM PC or compatible    computers  Windows   changing the energy saving delay  103  250   completing NetWare PSERVER  configuration 91   completing NetWare RPRINTER  configuration 96   configuring NetWare settings 105   configuring TCP IP settings 106   downloading PostScript files to the  printer 108   identifying the printer location 102   installing 79  175   job handling configuration network  option 104   naming the printer 101   opening 100   overview 99 100   preventing print job interrupts 104   printing font samples 102   quitting 100    339    340    Index    restarting the printer 108   setting the printer IP address 106  113   specifying a password for the print  server 97   turning automatic tray switching on or  off 103 104   turning startup pages on or off 102   viewing and changing communication  settings 107 108   viewing printer information 101   viewing the Ethernet address 104   Apple Printer Utility  Maci
235. rd settings  flip the switch back to the left hand position  and restart the printer  Then  after the printer has powered up  return the  switch to the right hand position     Sending PostScript files to the printer    You can download PostScript files to the printer to print a PostScript program  or Encapsulated PostScript  EPS  file  or to run a PostScript program to  change the printer   s internal settings  You can create a PostScript file in a  variety of text editing programs or by printing any document to a file     In the Apple Printer Utility program  choose Send PostScript File from the File menu   A dialog box appears   In the Send File dialog box  select the PostScript file you want to send to the printer     Click Send     Restarting the printer    If you have any problems printing  you may need to restart the printer to clear  its memory     Choose Restart Printer from the Utilities menu     If you have changes you haven t sent to the printer  a dialog box appears   asking whether you want to send the changes now     To confirm that you want to restart the printer  click Restart   When the printer lights stop blinking  the printer is ready to print     You can achieve the same effect by turning the printer off and then on again     IMPORTANT If the printer is on a network shared by other users  make sure no  one is attempting to use the printer before you restart it  Any print jobs that  are canceled must be resubmitted     Banner pages and NetWare    The Color 
236. re  setup        Add print servers to the access list displayed  or remove them  as desired       If you like  use the Queue Scan Time text box to change how often the  printer checks print queues for print jobs     a Click the Rescan button to send the new settings to the printer and to have  it renew its communications with the NetWare file server     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   105    Changing TCP IP configurations    You can specify the IP address of the printer  For information about  determining the printer   s IP address and setting up the printer on a TCP IP  network  see Chapter 4     1 Open the Communication Configuration category   You see a list of communication settings options   2 Open the TCP IP category     3 Inthe panel that appears  make the changes you want     Type in the printer   s IP address   a Drag the slider control to specify the printers subnet mask       Specify the default gateway address  that is  the IP address of the default  gateway used for sending packets off the local network          To add to the list of hosts that have acccess to this printer  click Add and  choose Local  Individual  or Group in the dialog box that appears         Choose Local to allow printing from all hosts on the same subnet as the  printer         Choose Individual to allow printing from a particular host  and specify  the host   s address     m Choose Group to allow printing from all hosts on a different subnet  and  indicate the group   
237. related toner cartridge  Remove the cartridge from  the printer and shake it gently     If the toner cartridge is empty  replace it   Clean the density sensor with the brush   For instructions  see Chapter 10      Try printing on a high quality paper to see if that helps     237    238    Chapter 12    Spots or blotches appear on printed pages        Try these steps    a Try printing on a high quality paper to see if that helps        Make sure youre printing the image on the correct side of the paper       Replace the toner cartridge containing the relevant color       Clean the inside of the printer to remove paper dust and toner particles    See    Cleaning the Paper Pickup Rollers    in Chapter 10 for instructions        Replace the photoconductor cartridge   Vertical lines  black or blank  appear on consecutive pages        Try these steps       Replace the toner cartridge containing the relevant color   a Replace the photoconductor cartridge       Clean the rollers inside the printer   For instructions  see Chapter 10    Spots  blotches  or blank areas appear on consecutive pages        Try these steps    a Try printing on a high quality paper to see if that helps       Replace the toner cartridge containing the relevant color     Replace the photoconductor cartridge         Clean the separation discharger wire   For instructions  see Chapter 10    Blank areas appear in an area that should be printed        Try these steps        Replace the toner cartridge containing t
238. remove the orange tray     Save the orange tray in case you ever need to remove the photoconductor for  troubleshooting     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    15    5 Make sure the photoconductor cartridge latch is in the locked position          Push the photoconductor  cartridge until this latch is  in the locked position                                                                                      16 l Chapter 1    6 Slide the toner disposal box into place                                                                                   The opening in the top  of the box fits here     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   17    7 Raise the transfer drum lever to lock the photoconductor cartridge in place     8 Close the disposal box cover     Disposal box cover                                                                                     Now go on to install the toner cartridges     18   Chapter 1    Installing the toner cartridges    You Il find four toner cartridges in the bottom of the printer setup kit  Each  toner cartridge contains the dry plastic powder that the printer uses instead  of ink  The first time you install the toner cartridges  follow the steps given  here  After that  each time you install a cartridge  follow the instructions in  Chapter 10   Instructions also come with replacement toner cartridges      Cartridge life varies  depending on the kind of printing you do  If you use the  printer to produce more graphic images t
239. rinter Utility   Open the Communication Configuration category   You see a list of communication settings options     Open the Port Configuration category     To change the  settings for these  ports  use the  pop up menus     In the panel that appears  you can change settings if you need to     For example  if you know that the printer will never receive a NetWare  message over the network  you can turn off the NetWare interface and stop  the printer from sending out unnecessary NetWare packets     LaserWriter 12 600 F     To see the original settings  click  Default  Then  if you want to  reset the ports to the original  settings  click Send     170 Error Timeout  Printer   s Zone  Ethernet Address  HetwWare Configuration  TCP IP Configuration    Port Configuration    Default    You cannot change the  LocalTalk Port    LocalTalk     LocalTalk setting     Ethernet Port  Ether Talk     ee          You can leave these ports on  TCP IP   the default  or turn them off     Parallel Port  Parallel  Hode      _    MSA __ __ If you use Apple Print Monitor     for Windows and the PostScript  LaserWriter Driver 3 0 together  over the parallel port  make sure  Data is set to AutoSelect     Protocol  Normal       To send the changes to the printer  click Send     This implements the new settings  You can alert users about the changes     IMPORTANT As long as you leave the printer   s configuration switch in the  right hand position  the printer uses the settings in this panel  If for an
240. rinter for notification purposes     If it is not already selected  select the name of the print server you specified in the  previous procedure and press Enter     The Print Server Information menu appears  listing options for specifying the  printer     Printers   Information and Status  Users   Operators   Serviced NetWare Servers  Description   Password   Audit    Select Printers and press Enter   The Defined Printers list appears   Press Ins  then type a name for the printer and press Enter     Choose a useful name associated with the printer   s location or other  identifying feature     Select the printer you just named and press Enter    The Printer Configuration menu for your printer appears   Select    Printer type    and press Enter    The    Printer type    list appears    Choose Other Unknown from the list  and press Enter    Ethernet falls into the Other Unknown category     If you are using NetWare 4 x  select Banner Type and press Enter  When the Banner Type  list appears  select PostScript and press Enter     To save the changes  press Esc once  then press Enter   Press Esc three times to return to the Available Options menu     Now that the print server is specified and an operating mode is selected  you  need to create a print queue and associate it with the print server  as  described in the next section     Creating a print queue and associating it with the print server  In this section you will create a print queue to associate with the printer   In the 
241. rinter on a TCP IP network and how to  help UNIX users get started using the printer     setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users    This chapter explains how to prepare the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS for use  on an AppleTalk network  configure the printer using the Apple Printer  Utility  and prepare users    Macintosh computers to print on the printer     Note  For instructions on setting up the printer for access by Macintosh client  computers on a NetWare network  see Appendix B     43    44    Before you begin    Before you begin  make sure you have    set up the printer as described in Chapter 1      connected the printer to your network        made backup copies of the printer disks    IMPORTANT    To use the printer software  you need a Macintosh with a 68020  or higher central processing unit  any Macintosh except a Macintosh Plus   SE  Classic    Portable  or PowerBook 100   Your Macintosh must have system  software version 7 1 or later and at least 4 megabytes  MB  of memory  If your  system software is an earlier version  you should obtain a system software  upgrade from an Apple authorized dealer   You must upgrade every user on  the network who doesn   t have system software version 7 1 or later      Installing all the printer software and fonts for the Macintosh requires  approximately 7 5 MB of free space on your hard disk     Initial Apple Talk setup    Chapter 2    Before Macintosh users can print with the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS  the  printer adminis
242. rogram  the program must be open  and the document window must be active     Choose Print from the File menu     In most cases a Print dialog box appears in which you can select options   including the number of copies and the pages to print  Depending on your  program  the Print dialog box may offer other options     Select the options you want and click Print     A message appears while the document is queued to the Print Manager  After  the message disappears  you can go on with your work while your document  is being printed     Setting printer driver options    Chapter 7    You can change the PostScript Printer Driver default options  For example   you can change the preset paper orientation to Portrait or Landscape     You set printer options in the printer driver Setup dialog box  which you can  open in three ways  as explained in the sections that follow      from the Control Panel   a from your application     from the Print Manager    Note  When changing options to print a specific document  it   s preferable to  change the options from within the application  Settings you change from  within an application will affect that document only and not all documents  printed afterward  Settings you change in an application   s Print dialog box  override print options you set in the Setup dialog box     Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Control Panel    From the Program Manager  double click the Control Panel icon to display the Control  Panel     Double click t
243. rol panel to connect  and set up the printers you ve installed  By default  each printer uses LPT 1   The Printers control panel Setup dialog lets you specify a different port  for  example  LPT2  or a NetWare queue     Click OK to clear the message   Another message tells you that installation is complete   Click Restart Windows to have the changes take effect     The Apple LaserWriter Software program group now appears on your  Windows Program Manager screen  Contained within the program group are  the ReadMe file  Apple Print Monitor for Windows  and the Apple Printer  Utility for Windows     Choose how to proceed     For users connected via the parallel cable  the default printer driver settings  should suffice     You can monitor your printer software with Apple Print Monitor for  Windows  see the section    Initial Apple Print Monitor for Windows Setup      later in this chapter     For instructions on using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows  see    Setting  Additional Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for Windows     later in  this chapter     To configure your printer software with NetWare  see    Initial Novell NetWare  Setup     later in this chapter     Installing software for Windows NT    The steps to install the PostScript Printer Description  PPD  file for the Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS  or other Apple printer  on a Windows NT system are  similar to those in the previous section  except that you select Custom Install   step 7  and click    Windows
244. rom 10 percent to 400 percent     m Copies Specifies the number of copies of each document page to print   m Watermarks Specifies which watermark to use    m Layout Specifies the number of pages to print on each sheet of paper     Preview Screen Shows changes you make in the driver settings     Note  To print on transparencies  you must select Transparency using the  Paper Type option in the Features tab dialog box     Additional printer options    In addition to the Paper tab  other tabs display settings for     PostScript   m Fonts   m Features   a Job control    a Watermark    Windows and DOS Users   181    182    Chapter 7    PostScript    Click the PostScript tab to display the PostScript tab dialog box  which  controls color printing  the communication protocol  and PostScript Level 2  features           Apple Color Laser riter 12 600 on LPT1     Paper i Features ii Fonts   PostScript   dob Control   Watermark      Performance Options   Margins  V Use PostScript Level 2 Features   Default   V Send Data in Binary 4 None                                 Color Options   Protocol Options     V Send Full Color Data   Default   Serial Parallel    Match Color Across Printers  lt  None  4ppleT alk             PostScript Timeout Values PostScript Performance    fo   4 Job Timeout   Seconds   Optimize for Speed  E Wait Timeout   Seconds  lt  Optimize for Portability                           Help   Cancel     OK    The PostScript tab dialog box lets you set the following options  
245. rom the Application menu at the  far right of the menu bar     Pee   oie ae    Hide Simplelent    Hide Others    Finder PrintMonitor is available only when  C4 PrintMonitor background printing is on   If you turn off background printing   messages on your screen keep you  informed of printing status        2 Inthe PrintMonitor dialog box  review the status of documents that are printing  and  make any changes you want      PrintMonitor    Printing  The document that s E Memo   Suzanne s Printer  currently printing Waiting  appears here  1    Letter   Suzanne s Printer Documents that are waiting    to print are listed here   To cancel the  current print request     click here  To schedule a specific time for a  Comments about Pages To Print  2 the list  then click Set Print Time     the status of the 118 Complete Imaging Page  1    document being  printed appear here        3 When you finish  click the close box     Removing the Macintosh Desktop Printing Software    337    Index    A    A4 size paper 25  205  211 213  261  accessory and part number list 267  acoustic noise specifications 262  Adobe Type Manager  ATM    See also fonts  changing size of the font cache 110  installing removing Type 1 fonts   Windows 109 110  installing  Windows 79  PostScript fonts and 279  turning on or off 110  air and ozone filters  replacing 317 319  Alert light 39  218   222  324  328 332  aliases for desktop printer icons 160  ammonia based cleaners 3  222  Apple authorized service provide
246. rom the Windows Program Manager  choose Run from the File menu     Type a  setup or b  setup  depending on which drive holds your installation  disk  in the command line field and click OK     After a few moments  a welcome message is displayed that allows you to  select Express Installation or Custom Installation  or De Install     Express Installation installs all the software you need to print with your Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS  It creates the Apple LaserWriter Software program  group and installs within it the ReadMe file  Apple Print Monitor for  Windows  and the Apple Printer Utility for Windows  used to name the  printer and perform various printer administrative functions     Custom Installation lets you specify what portions of the software you would  like to install  De Install lets you remove previously installed LaserWriter  software     10  11    12    13    14    Click Express Installation     A window appears that keeps you informed as file decompression proceeds   Insert other printer disks  and click OK  as the program asks for them     Instructions appear describing the next three steps in the installation  procedure  Take a moment to read them     Click Continue   The Adobe Printers control panel appears   Select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS and click OK     The PostScript Printer Driver files  Apple Print Monitor for Windows  and  the Apple Printer Utility for Windows are installed on the hard disk  A  message appears telling you that the driver sof
247. rs  If the Macintosh NLM is installed and  operating  a NW MAC option will be available     Select the NW MAC option and press Enter    A list of configuration options appears    Select Configure Print Services and press Enter    A list of print service configuration options appears   Select Quick Configuration and press Enter    A list of lookup parameter options appears    Select the Printer Model entry and press Enter    A list of printer types appears    Select the LaserWriter Pro 630 option and press Enter     This selection provides a printer type similar to the Color LaserWriter  12 600 PS     In the lookup parameter list  change the zone name to the zone in which the printer is  currently located     10  11    12    13    14    15    16  17    Select the Perform Lookup option and press Enter     In the list of installed printers  locate and select the newly installed printer from the list    It should be identified as    Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS         If necessary  edit the Spooler   s AppleTalk Name field and press Esc to complete the  setup     Note  You can also edit information about the print server or spooler  See the  documentation provided with NetWare for more information     Press Esc to exit the utility    The NetWare for Macintosh Configuration screen appears    Select Edit SYS  SYSTEM AUTOEXEC BAT from the list of options and press Enter   A window appears  displaying the file   s contents     Insert the following line after the load afp statement   
248. rum lever to the right     8 Open the disposal box cover                                                                                            Appendix E    9 Tap the toner disposal box to settle the toner                                                           10 Remove the toner disposal box   11    Put the plug into the opening in the toner disposal box     The plug prevents loose toner from leaking out of the box        The stopper is stored here   Pull it loose and use it to  plug the opening     12 Put the toner disposal box into a resealable plastic bag and seal the bag     Packing and Moving the Printer   297    13 Remove the photoconductor cartridge          Press the latch to release  the photoconductor     Pull the photoconductor  out of the printer                                                                                      Squeeze the small latch and slide the photoconductor out of the printer   14 Place the photoconductor in its orange tray and its original wrapping     If you don t have the original packaging  put the photoconductor into a black  plastic bag to protect it from exposure to light and contact with any abrasive  surface or lint     298   Appendix E    15 Remove the fuser oil bottle                                                                          Place the bottle in a resealable plastic bag and seal the bag     Packing and Moving the Printer   299    300    Appendix E    16    Remove all the fuser oil from inside the printer  
249. s  see Appendix A                       When the photoconductor is wearing out  Photoconductor  the Alert and photoconductor lights glow  cartridge    Instructions for replacing the photoconductor cartridge come in the package  with the new photoconductor and two toner disposal boxes   You use two  toner disposal boxes during the lifetime of one photoconductor cartridge      If the light comes on in the middle of a printing job  and the output is still  satisfactory  continue printing if you wish  You won t harm the printer by  doing so  The printer stops automatically if there is chance it could be  damaged     Note  Dont throw away the used photoconductor cartridge  See the  instructions that come with the new photoconductor for information on how  to return the used photoconductor to the manufacturer  By returning the used  photoconductor cartridge  you help reduce waste and preserve the  environment     Maintenance    221    222    Chapter 10    Fuser needs replacement    When the fuser is worn out  the Alert and fuser lights glow  As the fuser  approaches the end of its life  the status panel shows a warning  prompting  you to order a replacement kit  When the fuser is completely worn out  the  printer stops working     For information about ordering replacement supplies  see Appendix A     Fuser                When the fuser is wearing out  the  Alert and fuser lights glow     In Appendix F you ll find instructions for replacing the fuser  together with a  transfer drum
250. s subnet mask     a Click Send to send the changes to the printer     m To remove a printer from the list of hosts that have acccess to this printer   click Remove     4 To send the changes to the printer  click Send     106   Chapter 3    Viewing and changing communication settings    If you dort need all of the printers communication settings for your network  environment  you can turn unnecessary settings off with the Apple Printer  Utility     On the printer  make sure the configuration switch is in the right hand  o  position     On the computer  open the Apple Printer Utility     Configuration  switch   CU                      A  WM                   Click the triangle to open the Communication Configuration category   You see a list of communication settings options    Open the Port Configuration category    In the panel that appears  turn off settings you don   t use     For example  if you know that the printer will never receive an AppleTalk  message over the network  you can turn off the AppleTalk interface and stop  the printer from sending out unnecessary AppleTalk packets     To send the changes to the printer  click Send     This implements the new settings  You can alert users about the changes     Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users   107    108    Chapter 3    As long as you leave the configuration switch on the printer in the right hand  position  the printer uses these settings  If for any reason you need to return to  the original  standa
251. section are specific for a version of  PCONSOLE running under NetWare 4 02  If you are running PCONSOLE  under NetWare 4 1 or NetWare 3 x  the menus and commands will differ  slightly     Specifying a print server    Log in to a file server from a DOS client PC     IMPORTANT You must have supervisor or equivalent privileges to select a print  server     At the DOS prompt  type PCONSOLE and press Enter     The utility starts and the Available Options menu appears  displaying printer  console options    Print Queues   Printers   Print Servers   Quick Setup   Change Context    Use the arrow keys to highlight Print Servers in the menu and press Enter   If available  a list of available print servers appears     Select a print server or  if the print server does not yet exist  press Ins  type the print  server name  and press Enter     IMPORTANT The print server name you enter in PCONSOLE must match a  print server NLM  VAP  or a RPRINTER EXE stored on a dedicated    computer     10    11    12    13  14    In the Print Server menu  select the print server you want to use and press Enter     The Print Server Information menu appears     Printers   Information and Status  Users   Operators   Description   Password   Audit    Select Printers and press Enter     The Defined Printers menu appears  displaying options for configuring the  print server     Select a printer or  if there is no defined printer  press Ins  type the printer   s name  and  press Enter     Select a printer and 
252. selected       Reinstall the printer driver  See Chapter 7 for details about installing the  printer driver       Increase timeout values in the PostScript printer options tab dialog box         Check your NetWare configuration  Make sure the queue is set up and  captured  For RPRINTER  make sure that the dedicated print server is  running and connected  Make sure your Apple Printer Utility and NetWare  file server configurations match     a In the Job Control dialog box  select Send Error Handler  Then try again to  print the job  If there   s a problem with the job  an error page is printed   This lets you know that the printer   s working  but something   s wrong with  the job     Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect     The printer automatically goes into an energy saving mode after it   s been idle  for a while  When you print while it   s in this mode  the printer takes about a  minute to warm up before it can print the first page     The printer administrator can adjust this feature by using the Apple Printer  Utility on a Macintosh computer  see Chapter 2  or the Apple Printer Utility  for Windows on a Windows computer  see Chapter 3      My printer driver settings are ignored     Some applications have built in options such as orientation  scaling  and  number of copies that supersede those in the printer driver  See the  application   s manual to determine whether such options exist  If they do  they  override the printer driver settings  Con
253. serWriter 12 600 PS    Print quality The printer has a resolution of 600 x 600 dots per inch  with  color PhotoGrade     Speed The printer prints up to 12 pages per minute in black  cyan   magenta  or yellow  3 pages per minute in two or more colors  and 1  transparency per minute     Multiplatform support You can connect the printer to Macintosh  Windows   DOS  and UNIX computers     Connectivity The printer offers LocalTalk  Ethernet  and parallel  connections     Automatic traffic control Without any user intervention  the printer can accept  jobs simultaneously from AppleTalk  TCP IP  and NetWare networks and  from the parallel port     Fonts The printer supports both TrueType and PostScript    fonts  The  printer has 39 built in PostScript fonts     Energy savings The printer can automatically lower its power consumption  when it   s not being used     Hard disk option You can install an internal hard disk or attach up to six  external hard disks to store downloadable fonts     Flexible paper handling You can print up to 350 sheets  250 in the standard  paper cassette plus 100 in the multipurpose tray  without changing paper   You can also add a 250 sheet feeder     2    Anatomy of the printer                                        Front view  Top cover Face down Fuser oil Fuser  access door  output tray compartment access door  Quick reference  a i  gt E                                                       D                Toner cartridge  carousel knob  Standard Toner
254. sion sets   and other electronic devices  You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded  cables and connectors through an Apple authorized dealer  For non Apple peripheral devices   contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance     Communications Regulation Information xvii    xviii    Laser Information    DOC statement    DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio  noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard  entitled    Digital Apparatus     ICES 003 of the Department of Communications     Observation des normes   Classe B Cet appareil num  rique respecte les limites de bruits  radio  lectriques applicables aux appareils num  riques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme  sur le mat  riel brouilleur      Appareils Num  riques     NMB 003   dict  e par le ministre des  Communications     VCCI statement  FRUAR et BS Bes BEM AIC DUT    COMER  SUMTER  CEH dt OBE L AR BCH  SRB SHRED  TEEURTORRRE E I HAY EL  EMEREK ESMHRA  VCCI  ARMA LCBO ET     LOL  RRR IVYAL FEV ay SHRI RL CT CMI RSL   ShiMBOMA tC ZAILA To    WIR AE o TIF LIN ELT KEY     Laser information    WARNING Making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in your  equipment   s manual may result in hazardous exposure     WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser  The laser beam used in  this product is harmful to the eyes  The use of optical instrume
255. stalled in other folders or in the top level of the System  Folder may not work correctly  Additionally  bitmapped and TrueType fonts  stored outside of suitcases may not work correctly     Suitcases    A font suitcase is a special folder for collections of fonts     Courier    Suitcases provide a convenient way to organize fonts in the same font family   For example  it   s a good idea to use a single suitcase  called Courier  for all  fonts in the Courier font family   all Courier roman fonts as well as fonts  with names like Courier Bold and Courier Oblique     Note  PostScript fonts won t go into suitcases  you can  however  organize  TrueType fonts in suitcases     Courier    Bl Courier BoldOblique 18  Bl Courier BoldOblique 24  Courier   Courier F   Courier  bold    Courier 10   Courier 12   Courier 14   Courier 15   Courier 24     Courier Oblique 10     Courier Oblique 12    A       Using Fonts With the Printer    285    286    Appendix C    Combining suitcases  To merge all the fonts from one suitcase with another   drag one suitcase on top of the other  All the fonts from the dragged suitcase  will go into the other  and the dragged suitcase will disappear     A suitcase can also contain fonts from different font families  although you  should keep all fonts of the same family in the same suitcase  All the fonts  will still appear in menus with their proper names     You treat a suitcase as you would a folder  To open a suitcase  you double   click it  To add a font 
256. strator is responsible for initial setup of the hardware and the network   There is a great variety  however  in how different groups get new users  started  Here are the assumptions this book makes       Macintosh and Windows users install their own printer software       UNIX users have their workstations prepared for printing by the printer  administrator     Which chapters should   read     There are five main steps to preparing the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS it so  any user can print on it  Although you could do some steps in a different  order  these steps are organized to simplify troubleshooting     Step 1  Set up the hardware and connect the printer     Chapter 1 explains how to unpack the printer  install everything you need   toner cartridges  photoconductor  toner disposal box  and fuser oil   load  paper  and connect the printer to your network  At the end of the chapter  you  turn on the printer and it prints a startup page  assuring you that the printer  engine and controller board work correctly     Step 2  Configure the printer for a network connection or for a  direct connection     The next three chapters  plus Appendix B  explain how to configure the  printer on different networks or set it up by a direct connection     Chapter Computer Network interface and cable    Chapter 2 Macintosh AppleTalk on LocalTalk cables  AppleTalk on Ethernet cables  EtherTalk     Chapter 3 DOS and Windows Apple Print Monitor for Windows or  Novell NetWare on Ethernet cables 
257. sult the Read Me file that came with  your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS for specific application incompatibilities     My printer won   t draw paper from the multipurpose tray     You must use the Apple Printer Utility to tell the printer what paper size is  available in the multipurpose tray  Otherwise  the printer draws paper from  the paper cassette instead     When I print a document in multipage layout  an error page is the only thing printed     In the Job Control tab dialog box  select PostScript Header  Download Each  Job  The job should print properly  Do not click the Download Now button or  the problem may happen again     Novell NetWare troubleshooting  My text documents print fine  but   have problems with spreadsheets and graphics     If you re using NetWare 3 x  make sure banner pages are disabled  Try  removing the banner page  auto end capping  tabs expansion  and form feeds   Use the DOS CAPTURE command to set the following printing options     juno ha ZAE    nt fri 30    If you re using NetWare 4 x  banner pages must be PostScript     UNIX troubleshooting    If you are using the printer from a UNIX workstation  use this section for  troubleshooting tips     When I print a text file  the lines stairstep off the page     You need to use a print queue that adds a carriage return at the end of each  line  To set up the print queue  the printer administrator follows the  instructions in    Getting UNIX Users Started Using the Printer    in Chapter 4   To learn th
258. supported by Apple     PostScript printer fonts have no numbers associated with their names   because a single font can be scaled to any size  Many companies make  PostScript fonts  the following illustration shows icons for Adobe  Bitstream   and Fontek PostScript fonts  plus a generic PostScript font icon     za e H          Using Fonts With the Printer   279    280    Appendix C    TrueType fonts    A TrueType font is scalable  describing a typeface without rigidly specifying a  size  So it looks good whatever size you choose  TrueType fonts provide sharp  text at any size on screen or on paper  You can mix and match TrueType fonts  from various font vendors     Courier    TrueType fonts store individual text characters as mathematical descriptions  of lines and curves  rather than as groups of pixels  a bitmap   When a  program asks for a character in a particular size  such as 33 points  the  Macintosh uses mathematical calculations to enlarge the character   s outline  to 33 points and fill in the dots for the monitor or printer output     Sometimes you ll still get jagged edges when you print a document  even  when you use a TrueType font  In nearly all cases  this is because there isn t  enough memory available to scale the font properly for printing     Because you don t need a separate font for each character size in order for  your printing to look good  as you do with bitmapped fonts   TrueType font  names don t have numbers in them     How does a font look  To se
259. t mask  TCP IP configuration  Macintosh 68   69  Windows 106  suitcases for fonts 285   286  Sun OS version 4 1  configuring  127 128  supplies  reorder numbers for 268  system requirements  IBM PC or compatible 77  173  Macintosh 44  156    7    TCP IP network  changing configurations  Macintosh 68   69  Windows 106  connecting to 29  30  initial UNIX setup 112 118  printing from UNIX 202  technical specifications of the printer  257 262  television or radio reception  interference  with xvii  temperature requirements for the printer  3  262  terminators  SCSI 137  138  139  144  test page  printing in UNIX 118  three hole punched paper  loading into the multipurpose  tray 208  loading into the paper cassette  21 205  loading into the universal cassette 212  throwing away desktop printer icons 160    timeout settings  Windows 183  toner cartridge carousel  illustration 2  19   24  rotating 21  seated improperly 334  won   t turn 245  toner cartridges  installing 19   24  life expectancy of 260  redistributing the toner powder  219 eh  removing when moving the  printer 295  when to replace  218 219  237 239  241  328  toner disposal box  illustration 2  installing 12  17 18  removing when moving the printer  296 297  replacing when full 220  330  toner disposal box light on status panel  220  330  toner flakes off the printed page 240  toner lights on status panel 39  218  328  toner powder  distributing 22  219  237  top cover access door  illustration 2  transceivers  Ether
260. tains a valid IP address  and the same hostname as inthe  etc ethers file     4  Verify that the rarpd daemon is running on the server  On many UNIX  systems  you can accomplish this by typing ps  e or ps  ax atthe  UNIX prompt on the server  If the daemon isn   t running  type     usr etc rarpd  a     5  Turn the printer off and then back on     Troubleshooting   253    254    Density control panel    Chapter 13    The printer has been adjusted at the factory to produce the best possible  image quality  All Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS printers come with these  default settings in effect     There are always small variations in color between different printers  If you  have two Color LaserWriter printers on the same network  you can use the  density control panel to make subtle changes to match the two printers     Because the color matching methods assume the printer is in the default  condition  changing the settings may produce images of an inferior quality  If  you want to perform your own color correction  however  you can use the  controls on the panel to adjust the color balance of each color     Press the Color Select button to select the color you want to change                                 c C4                                                                                          l  r DEFAULT 7 ENTER    d LI                   To increase the density of the color  press the   button  to decrease the density  press  the   button     The indicators light up to sho
261. talled  Printers list     Click Setup     The Setup dialog box appears     Note  You can also open the Setup dialog box from within many Windows  programs  Check your program documentation to see if you can change your  printer setup from within your program     Click Fonts    Click Font Downloader    The Font Downloader dialog box appears   Select the destination device from the list box     To download to RAM  choose    memory     or to download to a hard disk   choose the name of the hard disk     Select the fonts you want to download from the Fonts Available list     Fonts that are already present in the printers ROM do not need to be  downloaded  For a list of these fonts  see Appendix A or print a list of font  samples by choosing Print Font Samples in the Apple Printer Utility   for Windows     Click Download     The Downloader informs you of its progress as it downloads fonts     Note  While downloading  you can use other programs  but you can   t print   After you are finished downloading fonts  click Exit    You are returned to the Setup dialog box    Click OK to close the Setup dialog box    Click Close to close the Printers dialog box    Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel     You can confirm that the fonts were downloaded by printing a list of font  samples with the Apple Printer Utility for Windows     Using a hard disk    You can add an internal or external hard disk to the Color LaserWriter 12 600  PS  A hard disk can store many soft 
262. te 136  photoconductor cartridge 12   18  the printer as an ATPS remote printer  269 275    printer software  Macintosh 44   48  156   158  Windows 78 81  174   176  quick reference booklet 9  SIMMs 145 149  toner cartridges  for the first time  19 24  toner disposal box 12  17 18  Install utility for ATPS NetWare remote  printer configuration 270 275  interference with radio or television  reception xvii  internal hard disk  downloading removing fonts 56   57  installing 140 143  International Color Consortium  ICC    color profile standards 292  IP address of the printer  specifying  Macintosh 68   69  UNIX 112 116  117  119  252 253  Windows 106    J  K    jagged edges     Jaggies     278  280  jammed paper  See paper jams  Job Control dialog box  Windows printer  Setup 187  Job Defaults category settings  Apple Printer Utility for Windows  103 104  Apple Printer Utility  Macintosh  61 62  job handling network option  Macintosh 62  Windows 104  job timeout setting  Windows 183  JPEG compressed images 166    Index   345    346    Index    L    landscape orientation 180  laser specifications 257  layout  specifying  Macintosh 163  Windows 181  legal size paper 25  242  261  length guide on universal cassette 212  letterhead paper  loading  in the multipurpose tray 209  in the standard paper cassette 27  205  in the universal cassette 212  life expectancy of printer and major  components 260  lights on status panel  See status panel  lights  lines on printed pages 238  LocalT
263. ter explains how to prepare the printer for UNIX users  Users     computers must be connected to the printer by an Ethernet network using  TCP IP  Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol      Before you begin    Set up the printer as described in Chapter 1  remembering to    unpack and prepare the printer      connect the printer to your TCP IP network using Ethernet cables      plug in and turn on the printer  Keep the startup page that automatically  prints out  It contains information you ll need      111    112    Initial TCP IP setup    Chapter 4    Before UNIX users can use the printer  the printer administrator must assign  an IP address for the printer  as described in the following sections     Will these instructions work for my flavor of UNIX     The instructions in this section describe how to perform the initial TCP IP  setup for most flavors of UNIX that use the Remote Line Printer Daemon   1pd  protocol  These include almost all versions of UNIX based on the  Berkeley Software Distribution  BSD   including Apple   s own UNIX  implementation  A UX     For information on other systems  see    Notes on Configuring Specific UNIX  Systems     later in this chapter     Background information    TCP IP is a protocol commonly used to connect UNIX systems over Ethernet  networks  Every TCP IP device must have a unique IP address  Much of the  initial work the printer administrator must do is related to assigning an IP  address  and a number of associated aliases
264. ting Up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer 269  Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 4 server 270  Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 3 x server 272  Modifying an existing ATPS configuration on a NetWare 3 x server 274    Using Fonts With the Printer 277  Kinds of fonts 277  Bitmapped fonts 278  PostScript fonts 279  TrueType fonts 280  QuickDraw GX imaging technology 281  How TrueType fonts work with other kinds of fonts 281  TrueType and bitmapped fonts 281  TrueType and PostScript fonts 283  How the Macintosh looks for fonts 283  Where fonts are stored 284  Suitcases 285  Styled fonts 287    Common questions about fonts 288    Contents   XV    Xvi    Contents    Working With ColorSync 291   The problem that ColorSync solves 291  About ColorSyne 292   How ColorSync works 292   Using ColorSyne 293    Packing and Moving the Printer 295    Replacing the Fuser 303   Replacing the fuser 304   Replacing the transfer drum cleaning unit 31  Replacing the air and ozone filters 317    Replacing the separation discharger unit 320    Diagnosing Problems for Service 323  Normal power on status panel behavior 324  Paper Out and Paper Jam lights both flash 325  Two hardware problems you may be able to fix 325  Out of paper 326  Paper jams 327  Regular maintenance 328  Low toner 328  Low fuser oil 329  Toner disposal box is full 330  Photoconductor cartridge is wearing out 331  Fuser needs replacement 332  Problem with internal random access memory  RAM  333   
265. tion is complete     Windows and DOS Users   195    196    Printing to a PostScript file    Chapter 7    As an alternative to printing your document on the printer  you can save a  PostScript language description of your document as a disk file  PostScript  language descriptions of documents can be useful for      creating document archives      printing documents without using the program that created them  at a  service bureau  for example       diagnosing printing problems    You may also want to print an Encapsulated PostScript  EPS  file  You can  use EPS files to export single pages from one program to another  EPS files  can include any combination of text  graphics  and images  but they do not  describe complete documents  For example  by saving an EPS file  you can  insert a page of a document created with one program as an illustration in a  document created by another program     Note  PostScript files are normally ASCII text files that can be opened with  any word processing program  However  if you select the Send Data in Binary  option in the PostScript Options dialog box  the PostScript files may include  binary characters that make them unsuitable for use with a word processor     You can use either of two methods to create PostScript files  If your program   s  Print dialog box has a Print to File checkbox  you can use this checkbox to  create a PostScript file  this is the preferred method  Refer to your program  documentation for information  If your progra
266. to set optional printer parameters that you want to use for all  documents     To change printer settings for a specific document  without changing the  printer   s basic defaults   use the Print and Print Setup dialog boxes  Network  users should use the Print and Print Setup dialog boxes to choose the  individual settings for their documents    Use the Apple Printer Utility to      view information about the printer  such as the AppleTalk printer name and  the total number of pages printed      give the printer an AppleTalk name     identify the printer   s location     print font samples     turn printing of the startup page or the demonstration page on or off    conserve power consumption by setting the energy saving delay     set paper handling options   a set when the printer closes print jobs to provide faster throughput      view the Ethernet address    Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users    99        name the printer on NetWare networks by assigning it a PPERVER or  RPRINTER name      assign a password for NetWare networks     create an access list for TCP IP and NetWare networks    view and set the IP address     view and configure the printers communication settings  m send PostScript files to the printer      restart the printer    IMPORTANT The Apple Printer Utility for Windows works only with the Color  LaserWriter 12 600 PS  When you use the utility to set a parameter  the  setting is stored in the printer and affects all Macintosh  Windows  an
267. trator must install the printer software and fonts and configure  the printer     Step 1  Installing the software the printer administrator needs    To install the printer software on a Macintosh computer  follow these steps     IMPORTANT Do not    drag install    the printer software  If you do  the files  wont be properly decompressed and won t work     Turn off any automatic virus detection programs you have on your Macintosh computer     If you don t  problems may occur during the installation  After installation is  complete  you can turn the virus detection programs back on   For  instructions on turning off each virus detection program  see the manual that  came with the program  or telephone the manufacturer of the program      Press and hold down the Shift key  then choose Restart from the Special menu     When a message on the screen tells you that the extensions are off  you can  release the Shift key  Your extensions have been turned off  When you restart  the Macintosh after software installation  the extensions will turn on again     Make sure the printer software disks are locked   Insert Printer Disk 1 for Macintosh into a disk drive   If necessary  open the disk icon     To start the Installer program  double click its icon     Installer    In the Welcome dialog box that appears  click Continue     After a moment  the Install dialog box appears  At the top of the dialog box is  a pop up menu set to allow you to perform an Easy install     IMPORTANT The Instal
268. trude from the feeder   The printer fits over these        As you lower the printer  align the corners of the printer directly over those of  the base                                                        7    8  9    Insert the locking connectors     The locking connectors secure the printer to the feeder                                           Insert the straight end of a  locking connector through   the foot of the printer   securing it to the locator point                    Replace both paper cassettes  one goes inside the printer  the other inside the feeder      Connect the feeder   s short power cable to the printer                 WN  WN                   Installing Options    133    10 Connect the longer power cable  the one previously used for the printer  between the  optional feeder and a grounded electrical outlet                          WN     WN                   11 Turn on the printer   12 Configure your printer software to use the 250 sheet feeder     Next you must configure the printer software on your computer to use the  new paper option  For instructions  see    Configuring Your Software for New  Printer Options     later in this chapter     For instructions on loading paper into the feeder  see    Loading the Optional  250 Sheet Universal Cassette    in Chapter 9  For information about printing  options with a Macintosh computer  see Chapter 6  For information about  printing options with an IBM PC or compatible computer  see Chapter 7     134   Cha
269. tside of the printer     There are five pieces of tape attached at various points on the printer     Open the fuser access door and remove the two orange spacers from inside                             Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS   7    8    Chapter 1    Slide the paper cassette back into the printer   Open the front door and remove the shipping screw     The screw is encased in an orange plastic sheath  Turn the screw  using a coin  or Phillips screwdriver  and pull it out  Put the shipping screw in a safe place  in case you ever need to ship the printer to a new location                                L    Cine                         b  H                   S  mc   H                  i  f       Leave the printers door open  The next few sections contain instructions on  installing other items from the printer setup kit     It   s a good idea to save the shipping carton and other packing materials in  case you need to transport the printer at some time     Installing the quick reference booklet    The quick reference booklet helps users solve some problems with the  printer  For example  the quick reference tells users how to clear a paper jam  and load paper into the paper cassette  It should always be inside the printer   available to users who don   t have this manual     Take the quick reference out of the printer setup kit and hang it inside the  printer door                                         ia   ak                Hang the quick reference on the ho
270. tup page for the  printer   s name        If you are using an AppleTalk network that contains zones  you may not  have selected the correct zone for the printer     a There s a problem in the network cable system somewhere between your  computer and the printer you want to use  Make sure that all the cables are  properly connected  If you still can   t resolve the problem  the printer   s  electronics or the network connector boxes may not be functioning  properly  Call an Apple authorized dealer       The printer has the same name as other printers on the network  If that   s  the case  the printer automatically appends a number to the end of its name  when it   s turned on  The number may change each time you turn on the  printer  The printer administrator can change the name using the Apple  Printer Utility  as described in Chapter 2  or the Apple Printer Utility for  Windows  as described in Chapter 3     m Check the Network control panel to make sure the correct network  is selected     A desktop printer icon appears again as soon as you drag it to the trash     You must always have at least one desktop printer icon  If you drag your last  desktop printer to the Trash  the computer instantly creates another one just  like it     An X appears over the desktop printer icon     The X indicates that the desktop printing software is not working         You may have started the computer using a different startup disk or  temporarily turned off all the software extensions  When
271. tware was successfully  installed     Click OK to dismiss the message     Select another printer  if any  and click OK to install  Repeat for each printer you want  to install     When you   re done  click Close     A message appears telling you to use the Printers control panel to connect  and set up the printers you ve installed  By default  each printer uses LPT 1   The Printers control panel Setup dialog box lets you specify a different port   for example  LPT2 or a NetWare queue     Click OK to clear the message   Another message tells you that installation is complete   Click Restart Windows to have the changes take effect     The Apple LaserWriter Software program group now appears on your  Windows Program Manager screen  Contained within the program group are  the ReadMe file  Apple Print Monitor for Windows  and the Apple Printer  Utility for Windows     Windows and DOS Users   175    176    Chapter 7    Choose how to proceed     For most users connected via the parallel cable  the default printer driver  settings should suffice     You can monitor your printer software with Apple Print Monitor for  Windows  see the section    Initial Apple Print Monitor for Windows Setup      in Chapter 3     For instructions on using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows  see    Setting  Additional Parameters with the Apple Printer Utility for Windows     in  Chapter 3     To configure your printer software with NetWare  see    Initial Novell NetWare  Setup     in Chapter 3     For
272. u can fill the  cassette with US  letter size paper  or A4 paper  depending on the type of  paper cassette you have   You can use plain paper  letterhead paper  or three   hole punched paper  To refill the paper cassette  insert paper as shown in the  following illustrations       Do not stack paper  Slide paper under the retainers  higher than this point        Load three hole punched  paper with the holes toward Load letterhead paper face up   the back of the cassette        Make sure paper fits under  these corner brackets     You can push the paper down   but don t overload the cassette     Loading Paper   205    206    Using the multipurpose tray    Chapter 9    The multipurpose tray is built into the printer  You can use the multipurpose  tray for automatic and manual feed printing     Opening the multipurpose tray    To use the multipurpose tray you must first open it  Pull on the latch at the  top of the tray and then lower the tray slowly  Pull open the extension to  adjust the tray so that your paper does not extend over the edge           Pull the extension all the  way out  then press gently  to lock it in place           The extension can  support a stack of up to  100 sheets of paper   or 50 transparencies                                The guides slide to rest  against paper or transparencies                 Placing paper and transparencies in the multipurpose tray    You can use the multipurpose tray for all your printing jobs  You can keep  a small stack of p
273. upplies   259    260    Appendix A        Times Bold  Times BoldItalic  Times Italic  Times Roman  a   Zapf Chancery Mediumltalic    Zapf Dingbats    Speed   m Prints 12 pages per minute maximum in black  magenta  cyan  or yellow  3  pages per minute maximum in 2 or more colors using letter size paper  and    transparency per minute  Actual speed depends on the images printed    Printer life expectancy   ae Minimum life expectancy is 5 years or 300 000 pages in black and white or  150 000 color pages  with no monthly page limit  Recommended  maintenance interval is 60 000 pages due to wear on fuser and rollers    Toner cartridge life expectancy   a 4 000 pages per color when printing documents with average page coverage  of 5    Photoconductor cartridge life expectancy    a 40 000 pages in black and white or 10 000 pages in color  continuous  printing   a 13 000 pages in black and white or 6 500 pages in color  intermittent  printing  that is  printing only single page documents  an unlikely sitution    Fuser oil life expectancy   m 10 000 pages    Fuser assembly life expectancy   a 60 000 pages   Transfer drum cleaner life expectancy  a 60 000 pages   Printing materials    Uses 16  to 28 pound laser quality bond  60 to 90 g m      Accepts most  textured and colored stock  Accepts Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS A4 and  Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS Letter transparencies     The paper used should not scorch  melt  transfer material  or release  hazardous emissions when heated to 20
274. urning off each virus detection program  see the manual that  came with the program  or telephone the manufacturer of the program      Log on to the server from the computer where you want to install the software   Open the folder that contains the printer software    Double click the Installer icon    A dialog box opens to describe the installation    Click the Continue button to close the dialog box    Click the Install button     The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and  then begins to install files     Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete   After the installation  the Installer tells you to restart your computer   Click the Restart button     The software is now installed and the printer is ready for use  If you turned  off any automatic virus detection programs on your Macintosh  turn them  back on now  After installing the printer software  you need to set it up to use  the printer  See    Selecting and Setting Up the Printer    in Chapter 6     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   15    What to do next    The printer is now set up on your AppleTalk network  If you want to install  any options  see Chapter 5  To learn how to print from a Macintosh computer   see Chapter 6  To set up the printer for Windows users  see Chapter 3  To set  up the printer for UNIX users  see Chapter 4     76   Chapter 2    Setting Up the Printer for Windows  and NetWare Users    This chapter describes how to set up t
275. ust meet these requirements     IBM PC or compatible  with an 80386 or higher CPU   hard disk drive   at least 4 megabytes  MB  of random access memory  RAM   Microsoft Windows 3 1 or 3 1x or Windows for Workgroups 3 11 or 3 1x  MS DOS version 3 3 or higher  5 0 or higher recommended    3 5 inch floppy disk drive that reads 144 MB disks   NetWare requires an 80386 CPU with NetWare version 30 or higher    each user of the Apple Printer Utility or Apple Print Monitor must have  NetWare Client Software for Windows 3 12 or 4 x installed    Installing all the printer software for the IBM PC or compatible computer  requires approximately 3 5 MB of free space on your hard disk     173    174    Installing the Windows printer software    Chapter 7    To install the Windows printer software  if not already installed by your  system administrator   follow these steps  These instructions assume that you  have a mouse or similar pointing device     Find the Windows disks that came with the printer and make sure they   re locked     You lock a disk by sliding up its write protection tab  The disk is locked when  you can see through the hole     Start Windows     Before installing the software  make sure the Windows Control Panel and  Printers control panel are closed     Insert Printer Disk 1 for Windows into a floppy disk drive     Read the README TXT file on Printer Disk 1 for Windows to check for late breaking  news     You can do this with Windows Notepad or another word processor   F
276. ute PostScript Fonts for TrueType Fonts on This Printer                         r TrueType Substitutions for All Printers    For This TrueType Font  Substitute This Font     Arial Rounded MT Bold  Book Antiqua  Bookman Old Style        Braggadocio                         The TrueType Fonts tab dialog box lets you set the following options       Send TrueType Fonts to This Printer as Tells the driver what kind of PostScript  fonts to create for TrueType fonts  Select one of these options     a Type   to synthesize outline PostScript fonts   a Type 3 to synthesize bitmapped PostScript fonts   a Type 42 to package TrueType fonts for the PostScript printer         Dont Send to use TrueType fonts that are resident in the printer or are  supplied by print manager software   No TrueType fonts are resident on  the printer as it is shipped from the factory        Substitute PostScript Fonts for TrueType Fonts on This Printer When checked   tells the driver to substitute PostScript fonts available to the printer for  TrueType fonts  The driver uses the TrueType Substitutions table to  determine which PostScript font to use for each TrueType font installed on  your system  Substituting PostScript fonts for TrueType fonts speeds  printing  especially when the PostScript fonts are resident in the printer        TrueType Substitutions for All Printers Lists all the TrueType fonts installed on  your system  and for each TrueType font  shows which PostScript font is  substituted for a TrueTy
277. utton to indicate which SCSI number the hard disk has   If it   s an internal hard disk  the SCSI number is 0    Click OK    You return to the Device Installer dialog box    Click Close     If the hard disk installed is already initialized in Apple HFS format  you can  now download fonts  If not  go on to initialize the hard disk     Initializing the hard disk    If you attach a hard disk to the printer to store fonts  you must initialize it  if  it is not already in Apple HFS format  before you can use it  You can do so by  following the steps below     WARNING Initializing the hard disk erases all the data on it  Initialize the  hard disk only if youre sure it   s new or if it   s OK to erase it     From the Program Manager  open the Control Panel   Double click the Printers icon to display the Printers dialog box     If it   s not already selected  select the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS from the Installed  Printers list     Click Setup     The Setup dialog box appears     Note  You can also open the Setup dialog box from within many Windows  programs  Check your program documentation to see if you can change your  printer setup from within your program     Click the Fonts tab    Click Font Downloader    The Font Downloader dialog box appears   Click Other    A dialog box opens    Click the Format Device button  then click OK   Select the disk name and click OK     Initializing the hard disk takes a few minutes  The Ready In Use light on the  printer blinks until initializa
278. ve enough space  to open the paper cassette     See Appendix A for more information about the physical requirements of  the printer     Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS    3    4    Important safety instructions    Chapter 1    Before you plug in your printer  read these important safety instructions     WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded  Your  printer is equipped with a three wire grounding plug   a plug that has a  third  grounding  pin  This plug will fit only a grounded AC outlet  This  is a Safety feature  If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet   contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly  grounded outlet  Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug     For your own safety and that of your equipment  always take the following  precautions     If any of the following conditions exists  disconnect the power plug  by  pulling the plug  not the cord     a the power cord or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged     you spill something into the case     your printer is exposed to rain or any other excess moisture     your printer has been dropped or the case has been otherwise damaged    you suspect that your printer needs service or repair      you want to clean the case  use only the recommended procedure  described in Chapter 10     Be sure that you always do the following     Keep your printer away from sources of liquids  such as wash basins   bathtubs  shower stalls  and so on     Prote
279. w         For the fastest printing  choose Black and White   The image quality won t  be as good  especially if the original image is in color      m If youre using a customized color matching method or printer profile   choose ColorSync Color Matching  Printing with ColorSyne Color  Matching  the computer does the work  matching the RGB colors on your  monitor and the printer   s profile and sending the correct CMYK  information to the printer     Be sure to set the ColorSync system profile to match your monitor   See  Appendix D      m If your print job contains JPEG compressed images  such as QuickTime or  QuickTake 100 images  choose PostScript Color Matching  Printing with  PostScript Color Matching  more color matching is done on the printer     Click OK     In the Print dialog box  click Print     Choose the reporting  method you want  from this pop up  menu     5  6    Reporting printing errors    You can specify how printing errors are reported when they occur  You can  have the printer provide no special reporting  provide a summary of the print  error on your Macintosh screen  when using foreground printing   or print a  page reporting the error     Choose Print from the File menu  or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and  drop it on the printer      The Print dialog box appears   In the Print dialog box  make the selections you want   Click Options     In the Print Options dialog box  choose what you want     Print Options    Cover Page        None  O 
280. w progress toward increased or decreased color  density     Press the Color Select button to select the color you want to change   Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each color you want to change    When you are finished changing color density  press Enter    Press Test Print to verify that the new settings are what you want   These changes affect all print jobs from now on     To return to the default setting for a color  select the color and press the   and     buttons  together     Appendixes    Appendix A    Appendix B    Appendix C  Appendix D  Appendix E  Appendix F  Appendix G  Appendix H    Technical Information and  Printer Supplies    Setting Up the Printer as an  ATPS Remote Printer    Using Fonts With the Printer  Working With ColorSync   Packing and Moving the Printer  Replacing the Fuser   Diagnosing Problems for Service    Removing the Macintosh Desktop  Printing Software          Appendix A  Technical Information and Printer Supplies    Specifications  Marking engine     Canon HX LBP print engine      3 ppm in color  12 ppm in black  cyan  magenta  or yellow  1 ppm for a transparency  m 600 x 600 dpi with Color PhotoGrade    m Enhanced 600 dpi grayscale imaging  effective 200 line screen halftone   122 gray levels     Laser   a Type  Semiconductor laser GaAlAs  a   Wavelength  780 nm       Output power  1 mW    257    258    Appendix A    Controller    AMD Am29030 25 MHz microprocessor   8 MB of ROM  including 39 Type 1 fonts    12 MB of RAM  expandable to 40 MB    
281. x that appears  select the page setup options you want     Most Macintosh programs use a dialog box similar to the one shown below   although the exact features may vary     Use the Layout pop up menu to choose  Use this pop up menu to indentify 1  2  or 4 pages per sheet   The printer    the paper size you are using  reduces or enlarges pages to fit the layout    LaserWriter 8 Page Setup When the selections  Paper  are set the way you  7 want  click OK   ayout  _ 1 Up Y  To see a dialog box  Reduce or  Enlarge  i that lets you select  Orientation   ii  T enhancements to  ff the printed image   click Options     This picture illustrates your  choice of paper  layout  and  orientation  and it reflects  changes as you make them     When you   ve made your choices  click OK     To make the printer   s current page setup settings the default software settings   hold down Option and click OK   Some programs may not support this  method of setting defaults      Macintosh Users    163    164    To define a single    paper source  click All     Then choose a paper  source from the  pop up menu     To define multiple  paper sources   click    First from      Then choose   one paper source  from each of the  pop up menus     Chapter 6    Printing documents    Most programs on the Macintosh use a Print dialog box similar to the one  shown below  although the exact features may vary  You can use the dialog  box to specify print options such as the number of copies you want printed     So
282. y     In the panel that appears  click the checkboxes to turn either the startup page or the  demonstration page  or both  on or off     LaserWriter 12 600 PS    Set Defaults Update Info     b Printer Information    Printer Preferences  Hame  Location   Fonts  Disks    Startup Pages    E  Print a startup page each time the printer is turned on     E  Print a demonstration page each time the printer is turned on        To send the startup page setting to the printer  click Send     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   59    60    Chapter 2    4    Conserving energy    Your Color LaserWriter 12 600 PS automatically reduces its power  consumption after 60 minutes of inactivity  You can lengthen or shorten the  time that the printer remains idle before it reduces its power consumption   Once the printer turns down its power  it will need to warm up again before  printing the next document  You or other network users may experience a  small delay  3 minutes  in printing     Open the Printer Preferences category   You see a list of preferences   Open the Energy Saving Delay category     In the panel that appears  choose a time interval from the pop up menu     LaserWriter 12 600 P      Set Defaults Update Info      gt  Printer Information    Printer Preferences  Hame  Location   Fonts    Disks    Startup Page   Choose a time interval  Energy Saving Delay l from this pop up menu        To send the energy saving delay setting to the printer  click Send     An X means the  pri
283. y  reason you need to return to the original  default settings  click the Default  button  If you cannot use the Apple Printer Utility to reset the ports  flip the  configuration switch to the left hand position  Then restart the printer and  return the switch to the right hand position     Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users   T1    72    Chapter 2    sending PostScript files to the printer    You can download PostScript files to the printer to print a PostScript program  or Encapsulated PostScript  EPS  file  or to run a PostScript program to  change the internal settings of the printer  You can create a PostScript file in a  variety of text editing programs or by printing any document to a file  just  click the File button in the Print dialog box      Choose Send File from the File menu    In the Send File dialog box  select the PostScript file that you want to send to the printer   Click Add    Click Send     Restarting the printer    If you have any problems printing  you may need to restart the printer to clear  its memory     Choose Restart Printer from the Utilities menu     If you have changes you haven t sent to the printer  a dialog box appears  warning that any fonts that have been downloaded to the printer   s memory  will be lost     To confirm that you want to restart the printer  click Restart   When the printer lights stop blinking  the printer is ready to print     You can achieve the same effect by physically turning the printer on and off  again    
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
  Page 1 of 17 TITLE: QA APPROCAL: DATE: 1. REVISION Significant    Istruzioni per l`uso di base    Yazoo/Kees PTO-KM 23 User's Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file